]> gcc.gnu.org Git - gcc.git/blame - gcc/cse.c
Initial revision
[gcc.git] / gcc / cse.c
CommitLineData
7afe21cc 1/* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
64812ded 2 Copyright (C) 1987, 88, 89, 92, 93, 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
7afe21cc
RK
3
4This file is part of GNU CC.
5
6GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
7it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
8the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
9any later version.
10
11GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
12but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
13MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
14GNU General Public License for more details.
15
16You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
18the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
19
20
21#include "config.h"
9c3b4c8b
RS
22/* Must precede rtl.h for FFS. */
23#include <stdio.h>
24
7afe21cc
RK
25#include "rtl.h"
26#include "regs.h"
27#include "hard-reg-set.h"
28#include "flags.h"
29#include "real.h"
30#include "insn-config.h"
31#include "recog.h"
32
7afe21cc
RK
33#include <setjmp.h>
34
35/* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
36 through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
37 have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
38 expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
39
40 It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
41 when control paths merge; so, at each label, we forget all that is
42 known and start fresh. This can be described as processing each
43 basic block separately. Note, however, that these are not quite
44 the same as the basic blocks found by a later pass and used for
45 data flow analysis and register packing. We do not need to start fresh
46 after a conditional jump instruction if there is no label there.
47
48 We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
49 a hash table for most expressions, and several vectors together
50 with "quantity numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
51
52 The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
53 because it is faster. It is possible because registers references
54 contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
55 a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
56 identical if they have the same number. General expressions
57 do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
58 information recorded on an expression other than a register
59 is to keep it in a hash table.
60
61Registers and "quantity numbers":
62
63 At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
64 registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
65 numbers to indicate their contents. During scan, when the code
66 copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
67 When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
68 quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
69 `reg_qty' records what quantity a register is currently thought
70 of as containing.
71
72 All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to `max_reg'.
73 If register N has not been assigned a quantity, reg_qty[N] will equal N.
74
75 Quantity numbers below `max_reg' do not exist and none of the `qty_...'
76 variables should be referenced with an index below `max_reg'.
77
78 We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
79 quantity number. `qty_first_reg', `qty_last_reg',
80 `reg_next_eqv' and `reg_prev_eqv' hold these chains.
81
82 The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
83 Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
84 We replace any equivalent register with that one.
85
86 If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
87 REG expressions with `qty_mode' must be in the hash table for both
88 registers and must be in the same class.
89
90 The converse is not true. Since hard registers may be referenced in
91 any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
92 but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
93 of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
94
95Constants and quantity numbers
96
97 When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
98 in the appropriate element of qty_const. This is in addition to
99 putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
100
d45cf215 101 Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
7afe21cc
RK
102 macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value. In any
103 event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
104
105 When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
106 of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate element
107 of qty_const.
108
109 Integer constants don't have a machine mode. However, cse
110 determines the intended machine mode from the destination
111 of the instruction that moves the constant. The machine mode
112 is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
113 constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
114
115Other expressions:
116
117 To record known equivalences among expressions in general
118 we use a hash table called `table'. It has a fixed number of buckets
119 that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
120 These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
121 hash codes.
122
123 Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
124 currently have equivalent values.
125
126 Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
127 the expression. This is done using `reg_qty' and `qty_first_reg'.
128 The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
129 number, not the register number.
130
131 When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
132 hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
133 could be different as a result.
134
135 1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
136 ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed. That is because
137 nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
138 The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
139
140 The special cases are when the address is constant or is
141 a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
142 or a static chain pointer. When such addresses are stored in,
143 we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
144 due to overlap. `invalidate' does this.
145 All expressions that refer to non-constant
146 memory addresses are also invalidated. `invalidate_memory' does this.
147
148 2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
149 containing references to that register, and only those,
150 must be removed.
151
152 Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
153 a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
154 Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
155 entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
156 changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
157 the register's new value. This sequence of circumstances is rare
158 within any one basic block.
159
160 The vectors `reg_tick' and `reg_in_table' are used to detect this case.
161 reg_tick[i] is incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
162 reg_in_table[i] holds -1 if no references to register i have been
163 entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value reg_tick[i] had
164 when the references were entered. If we want to enter a reference
165 and reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i], we must scan and remove old references.
166 Until we want to enter a new entry, the mere fact that the two vectors
167 don't match makes the entries be ignored if anyone tries to match them.
168
169 Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
170 the equivalent-register chains. However, the vectors `reg_tick'
171 and `reg_in_table' do not apply to expressions which are simple
172 register references. These expressions are removed from the table
173 immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
174 we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
175 the register.
176
177 A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
178 reuse. A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
179 invalidates everything that resides in memory.
180
181Related expressions:
182
183 Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
184 are called related. When a constant expression is put in
185 the table, the related expression with no constant term
186 is also entered. These are made to point at each other
187 so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
188 register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression. */
189
190/* One plus largest register number used in this function. */
191
192static int max_reg;
193
194/* Length of vectors indexed by quantity number.
195 We know in advance we will not need a quantity number this big. */
196
197static int max_qty;
198
199/* Next quantity number to be allocated.
200 This is 1 + the largest number needed so far. */
201
202static int next_qty;
203
204/* Indexed by quantity number, gives the first (or last) (pseudo) register
205 in the chain of registers that currently contain this quantity. */
206
207static int *qty_first_reg;
208static int *qty_last_reg;
209
210/* Index by quantity number, gives the mode of the quantity. */
211
212static enum machine_mode *qty_mode;
213
214/* Indexed by quantity number, gives the rtx of the constant value of the
215 quantity, or zero if it does not have a known value.
216 A sum of the frame pointer (or arg pointer) plus a constant
217 can also be entered here. */
218
219static rtx *qty_const;
220
221/* Indexed by qty number, gives the insn that stored the constant value
222 recorded in `qty_const'. */
223
224static rtx *qty_const_insn;
225
226/* The next three variables are used to track when a comparison between a
227 quantity and some constant or register has been passed. In that case, we
228 know the results of the comparison in case we see it again. These variables
229 record a comparison that is known to be true. */
230
231/* Indexed by qty number, gives the rtx code of a comparison with a known
232 result involving this quantity. If none, it is UNKNOWN. */
233static enum rtx_code *qty_comparison_code;
234
235/* Indexed by qty number, gives the constant being compared against in a
236 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, it is undefined.
237 If the comparison is not with a constant, it is zero. */
238
239static rtx *qty_comparison_const;
240
241/* Indexed by qty number, gives the quantity being compared against in a
242 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, if it undefined.
243 If the comparison is not with a register, it is -1. */
244
245static int *qty_comparison_qty;
246
247#ifdef HAVE_cc0
248/* For machines that have a CC0, we do not record its value in the hash
249 table since its use is guaranteed to be the insn immediately following
250 its definition and any other insn is presumed to invalidate it.
251
252 Instead, we store below the value last assigned to CC0. If it should
253 happen to be a constant, it is stored in preference to the actual
254 assigned value. In case it is a constant, we store the mode in which
255 the constant should be interpreted. */
256
257static rtx prev_insn_cc0;
258static enum machine_mode prev_insn_cc0_mode;
259#endif
260
261/* Previous actual insn. 0 if at first insn of basic block. */
262
263static rtx prev_insn;
264
265/* Insn being scanned. */
266
267static rtx this_insn;
268
269/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the quantity number
270 of the register's current contents. */
271
272static int *reg_qty;
273
274/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of the next (or
275 previous) (pseudo) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
276 value.
277
278 Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
279
280 If reg_qty[N] == N, reg_next_eqv[N] is undefined. */
281
282static int *reg_next_eqv;
283static int *reg_prev_eqv;
284
285/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of times
286 that register has been altered in the current basic block. */
287
288static int *reg_tick;
289
290/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the reg_tick value at which
291 rtx's containing this register are valid in the hash table.
292 If this does not equal the current reg_tick value, such expressions
293 existing in the hash table are invalid.
294 If this is -1, no expressions containing this register have been
295 entered in the table. */
296
297static int *reg_in_table;
298
299/* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is
300 currently a REG expression in the hash table. Note the difference
301 from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
302 expression in the table. */
303
304static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
305
306/* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers that are invalidated
307 by a CALL_INSN. */
308
309static HARD_REG_SET regs_invalidated_by_call;
310
311/* Two vectors of ints:
312 one containing max_reg -1's; the other max_reg + 500 (an approximation
313 for max_qty) elements where element i contains i.
314 These are used to initialize various other vectors fast. */
315
316static int *all_minus_one;
317static int *consec_ints;
318
319/* CUID of insn that starts the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
320
321static int cse_basic_block_start;
322
323/* CUID of insn that ends the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
324
325static int cse_basic_block_end;
326
327/* Vector mapping INSN_UIDs to cuids.
d45cf215 328 The cuids are like uids but increase monotonically always.
7afe21cc
RK
329 We use them to see whether a reg is used outside a given basic block. */
330
906c4e36 331static int *uid_cuid;
7afe21cc 332
164c8956
RK
333/* Highest UID in UID_CUID. */
334static int max_uid;
335
7afe21cc
RK
336/* Get the cuid of an insn. */
337
338#define INSN_CUID(INSN) (uid_cuid[INSN_UID (INSN)])
339
340/* Nonzero if cse has altered conditional jump insns
341 in such a way that jump optimization should be redone. */
342
343static int cse_jumps_altered;
344
345/* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record
346 if it notices a reference to CC0, PC, or some other volatile
347 subexpression. */
348
349static int do_not_record;
350
7bac1be0
RK
351#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
352
353/* Scratch rtl used when looking for load-extended copy of a MEM. */
354static rtx memory_extend_rtx;
355#endif
356
7afe21cc
RK
357/* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
358 if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed. */
359
360static int hash_arg_in_memory;
361
362/* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
363 if it notices a reference to memory that's part of a structure. */
364
365static int hash_arg_in_struct;
366
367/* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
368 each recording one expression's information.
369 That expression is in the `exp' field.
370
371 Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
372 through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
373
374 Each set of expressions with equivalent values
375 are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
376 and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
377 the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
378 that chain. The chain is in order of increasing cost.
379 Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
380
381 The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
382 involve any reference to memory. These elements are removed
383 whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
384 To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
385 the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
386 the frame pointer or argument pointer.
387
388 The `in_struct' field is nonzero for elements that
389 involve any reference to memory inside a structure or array.
390
391 The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
392 (that differ by adding an integer).
393 The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
394 `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
395 chain is not useful.
396
397 The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
398
399 The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
400 a fixed address).
401
402 The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
403
404 The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
405 if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
406 field is the mode it was being used as. Each constant is
407 recorded separately for each mode it is used with. */
408
409
410struct table_elt
411{
412 rtx exp;
413 struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
414 struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
415 struct table_elt *next_same_value;
416 struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
417 struct table_elt *first_same_value;
418 struct table_elt *related_value;
419 int cost;
420 enum machine_mode mode;
421 char in_memory;
422 char in_struct;
423 char is_const;
424 char flag;
425};
426
7afe21cc
RK
427/* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
428 things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
429 down a lot of loops that happen frequently. */
430#define NBUCKETS 31
431
432/* Compute hash code of X in mode M. Special-case case where X is a pseudo
433 register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set). */
434
435#define HASH(X, M) \
436 (GET_CODE (X) == REG && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
2197a88a 437 ? (((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) reg_qty[REGNO (X)]) % NBUCKETS \
7afe21cc
RK
438 : canon_hash (X, M) % NBUCKETS)
439
440/* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for CSE.
441 It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
442 non-fixed hard regs.
443 A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed,
444 but not if it is an overlapping register. */
445#ifdef OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
446#define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
8bc169f2 447 (((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM \
6ab832bc 448 || fixed_regs[N] || global_regs[N]) \
7afe21cc
RK
449 && ! OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P ((N)))
450#else
451#define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
8bc169f2 452 ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM \
6ab832bc 453 || fixed_regs[N] || global_regs[N])
7afe21cc
RK
454#endif
455
456/* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt. Fixed
ac07e066
RK
457 hard registers and pointers into the frame are the cheapest with a cost
458 of 0. Next come pseudos with a cost of one and other hard registers with
459 a cost of 2. Aside from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'. */
460
6ab832bc 461#define CHEAP_REGNO(N) \
8bc169f2
DE
462 ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM \
463 || (N) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM \
464 || ((N) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER && (N) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER) \
465 || ((N) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
e7bb59fa 466 && FIXED_REGNO_P (N) && REGNO_REG_CLASS (N) != NO_REGS))
7afe21cc 467
6ab832bc
RK
468/* A register is cheap if it is a user variable assigned to the register
469 or if its register number always corresponds to a cheap register. */
470
471#define CHEAP_REG(N) \
472 ((REG_USERVAR_P (N) && REGNO (N) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) \
473 || CHEAP_REGNO (REGNO (N)))
474
7afe21cc
RK
475#define COST(X) \
476 (GET_CODE (X) == REG \
6ab832bc 477 ? (CHEAP_REG (X) ? 0 \
ac07e066 478 : REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1 \
7afe21cc 479 : 2) \
e5f6a288 480 : rtx_cost (X, SET) * 2)
7afe21cc
RK
481
482/* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
483 into the `qty_...' variables. */
484
485#define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (reg_qty[N] != (N))
486
487static struct table_elt *table[NBUCKETS];
488
489/* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
490 but currently removed from the table. */
491
492static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
493
494/* Number of `struct table_elt' structures made so far for this function. */
495
496static int n_elements_made;
497
498/* Maximum value `n_elements_made' has had so far in this compilation
499 for functions previously processed. */
500
501static int max_elements_made;
502
503/* Surviving equivalence class when two equivalence classes are merged
504 by recording the effects of a jump in the last insn. Zero if the
505 last insn was not a conditional jump. */
506
507static struct table_elt *last_jump_equiv_class;
508
509/* Set to the cost of a constant pool reference if one was found for a
510 symbolic constant. If this was found, it means we should try to
511 convert constants into constant pool entries if they don't fit in
512 the insn. */
513
514static int constant_pool_entries_cost;
515
516/* Bits describing what kind of values in memory must be invalidated
517 for a particular instruction. If all three bits are zero,
518 no memory refs need to be invalidated. Each bit is more powerful
519 than the preceding ones, and if a bit is set then the preceding
520 bits are also set.
521
522 Here is how the bits are set:
523 Pushing onto the stack invalidates only the stack pointer,
524 writing at a fixed address invalidates only variable addresses,
525 writing in a structure element at variable address
526 invalidates all but scalar variables,
527 and writing in anything else at variable address invalidates everything. */
528
529struct write_data
530{
531 int sp : 1; /* Invalidate stack pointer. */
532 int var : 1; /* Invalidate variable addresses. */
533 int nonscalar : 1; /* Invalidate all but scalar variables. */
534 int all : 1; /* Invalidate all memory refs. */
535};
536
6cd4575e
RK
537/* Define maximum length of a branch path. */
538
539#define PATHLENGTH 10
540
541/* This data describes a block that will be processed by cse_basic_block. */
542
543struct cse_basic_block_data {
544 /* Lowest CUID value of insns in block. */
545 int low_cuid;
546 /* Highest CUID value of insns in block. */
547 int high_cuid;
548 /* Total number of SETs in block. */
549 int nsets;
550 /* Last insn in the block. */
551 rtx last;
552 /* Size of current branch path, if any. */
553 int path_size;
554 /* Current branch path, indicating which branches will be taken. */
555 struct branch_path {
556 /* The branch insn. */
557 rtx branch;
558 /* Whether it should be taken or not. AROUND is the same as taken
559 except that it is used when the destination label is not preceded
560 by a BARRIER. */
561 enum taken {TAKEN, NOT_TAKEN, AROUND} status;
562 } path[PATHLENGTH];
563};
564
7afe21cc
RK
565/* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer). We check for
566 virtual regs here because the simplify_*_operation routines are called
567 by integrate.c, which is called before virtual register instantiation. */
568
569#define FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
8bc169f2
DE
570 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx || (X) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx \
571 || (X) == arg_pointer_rtx \
7afe21cc
RK
572 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
573 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
574 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
575 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
8bc169f2 576 || XEXP (X, 0) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx \
7afe21cc
RK
577 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
578 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
579 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)))
580
6f90e075
JW
581/* Similar, but also allows reference to the stack pointer.
582
583 This used to include FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P, however, we can't assume that
584 arg_pointer_rtx by itself is nonzero, because on at least one machine,
585 the i960, the arg pointer is zero when it is unused. */
7afe21cc
RK
586
587#define NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
8bc169f2 588 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx || (X) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx \
6f90e075
JW
589 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
590 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
591 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
592 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
8bc169f2 593 || XEXP (X, 0) == hard_frame_pointer_rtx \
6f90e075
JW
594 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
595 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
596 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)) \
7afe21cc
RK
597 || (X) == stack_pointer_rtx \
598 || (X) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
599 || (X) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx \
600 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
601 && (XEXP (X, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx \
602 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
603 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))
604
6cd4575e
RK
605static void new_basic_block PROTO((void));
606static void make_new_qty PROTO((int));
607static void make_regs_eqv PROTO((int, int));
608static void delete_reg_equiv PROTO((int));
609static int mention_regs PROTO((rtx));
610static int insert_regs PROTO((rtx, struct table_elt *, int));
611static void free_element PROTO((struct table_elt *));
2197a88a 612static void remove_from_table PROTO((struct table_elt *, unsigned));
6cd4575e 613static struct table_elt *get_element PROTO((void));
2197a88a
RK
614static struct table_elt *lookup PROTO((rtx, unsigned, enum machine_mode)),
615 *lookup_for_remove PROTO((rtx, unsigned, enum machine_mode));
6cd4575e 616static rtx lookup_as_function PROTO((rtx, enum rtx_code));
2197a88a 617static struct table_elt *insert PROTO((rtx, struct table_elt *, unsigned,
6cd4575e
RK
618 enum machine_mode));
619static void merge_equiv_classes PROTO((struct table_elt *,
620 struct table_elt *));
621static void invalidate PROTO((rtx));
622static void remove_invalid_refs PROTO((int));
623static void rehash_using_reg PROTO((rtx));
624static void invalidate_memory PROTO((struct write_data *));
625static void invalidate_for_call PROTO((void));
626static rtx use_related_value PROTO((rtx, struct table_elt *));
2197a88a
RK
627static unsigned canon_hash PROTO((rtx, enum machine_mode));
628static unsigned safe_hash PROTO((rtx, enum machine_mode));
6cd4575e 629static int exp_equiv_p PROTO((rtx, rtx, int, int));
f451db89 630static void set_nonvarying_address_components PROTO((rtx, int, rtx *,
6500fb43
RK
631 HOST_WIDE_INT *,
632 HOST_WIDE_INT *));
6cd4575e 633static int refers_to_p PROTO((rtx, rtx));
f451db89 634static int refers_to_mem_p PROTO((rtx, rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT,
6cd4575e
RK
635 HOST_WIDE_INT));
636static int cse_rtx_addr_varies_p PROTO((rtx));
637static rtx canon_reg PROTO((rtx, rtx));
638static void find_best_addr PROTO((rtx, rtx *));
639static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args PROTO((enum rtx_code, rtx *, rtx *,
640 enum machine_mode *,
641 enum machine_mode *));
96b0e481
RK
642static rtx cse_gen_binary PROTO((enum rtx_code, enum machine_mode,
643 rtx, rtx));
644static rtx simplify_plus_minus PROTO((enum rtx_code, enum machine_mode,
645 rtx, rtx));
6cd4575e
RK
646static rtx fold_rtx PROTO((rtx, rtx));
647static rtx equiv_constant PROTO((rtx));
648static void record_jump_equiv PROTO((rtx, int));
649static void record_jump_cond PROTO((enum rtx_code, enum machine_mode,
650 rtx, rtx, int));
651static void cse_insn PROTO((rtx, int));
652static void note_mem_written PROTO((rtx, struct write_data *));
653static void invalidate_from_clobbers PROTO((struct write_data *, rtx));
654static rtx cse_process_notes PROTO((rtx, rtx));
655static void cse_around_loop PROTO((rtx));
656static void invalidate_skipped_set PROTO((rtx, rtx));
657static void invalidate_skipped_block PROTO((rtx));
658static void cse_check_loop_start PROTO((rtx, rtx));
659static void cse_set_around_loop PROTO((rtx, rtx, rtx));
660static rtx cse_basic_block PROTO((rtx, rtx, struct branch_path *, int));
79644f06 661static void count_reg_usage PROTO((rtx, int *, rtx, int));
c407b802
RK
662
663extern int rtx_equal_function_value_matters;
7afe21cc
RK
664\f
665/* Return an estimate of the cost of computing rtx X.
666 One use is in cse, to decide which expression to keep in the hash table.
667 Another is in rtl generation, to pick the cheapest way to multiply.
668 Other uses like the latter are expected in the future. */
669
670/* Return the right cost to give to an operation
671 to make the cost of the corresponding register-to-register instruction
672 N times that of a fast register-to-register instruction. */
673
674#define COSTS_N_INSNS(N) ((N) * 4 - 2)
675
676int
e5f6a288 677rtx_cost (x, outer_code)
7afe21cc 678 rtx x;
e5f6a288 679 enum rtx_code outer_code;
7afe21cc
RK
680{
681 register int i, j;
682 register enum rtx_code code;
683 register char *fmt;
684 register int total;
685
686 if (x == 0)
687 return 0;
688
689 /* Compute the default costs of certain things.
690 Note that RTX_COSTS can override the defaults. */
691
692 code = GET_CODE (x);
693 switch (code)
694 {
695 case MULT:
696 /* Count multiplication by 2**n as a shift,
697 because if we are considering it, we would output it as a shift. */
698 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT
699 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) >= 0)
700 total = 2;
701 else
702 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
703 break;
704 case DIV:
705 case UDIV:
706 case MOD:
707 case UMOD:
708 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
709 break;
710 case USE:
711 /* Used in loop.c and combine.c as a marker. */
712 total = 0;
713 break;
538b78e7
RS
714 case ASM_OPERANDS:
715 /* We don't want these to be used in substitutions because
716 we have no way of validating the resulting insn. So assign
717 anything containing an ASM_OPERANDS a very high cost. */
718 total = 1000;
719 break;
7afe21cc
RK
720 default:
721 total = 2;
722 }
723
724 switch (code)
725 {
726 case REG:
6ab832bc 727 return ! CHEAP_REG (x);
ac07e066 728
7afe21cc 729 case SUBREG:
fc3ffe83
RK
730 /* If we can't tie these modes, make this expensive. The larger
731 the mode, the more expensive it is. */
732 if (! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
733 return COSTS_N_INSNS (2
734 + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
7afe21cc
RK
735 return 2;
736#ifdef RTX_COSTS
e5f6a288 737 RTX_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
7afe21cc 738#endif
e5f6a288 739 CONST_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
7afe21cc
RK
740 }
741
742 /* Sum the costs of the sub-rtx's, plus cost of this operation,
743 which is already in total. */
744
745 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
746 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
747 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
e5f6a288 748 total += rtx_cost (XEXP (x, i), code);
7afe21cc
RK
749 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
750 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
e5f6a288 751 total += rtx_cost (XVECEXP (x, i, j), code);
7afe21cc
RK
752
753 return total;
754}
755\f
756/* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
757 for a new basic block. */
758
759static void
760new_basic_block ()
761{
762 register int i;
763
764 next_qty = max_reg;
765
766 bzero (reg_tick, max_reg * sizeof (int));
767
768 bcopy (all_minus_one, reg_in_table, max_reg * sizeof (int));
769 bcopy (consec_ints, reg_qty, max_reg * sizeof (int));
770 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
771
772 /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
773 much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'. */
774
775 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
776 {
777 register struct table_elt *this, *next;
778 for (this = table[i]; this; this = next)
779 {
780 next = this->next_same_hash;
781 free_element (this);
782 }
783 }
784
785 bzero (table, sizeof table);
786
787 prev_insn = 0;
788
789#ifdef HAVE_cc0
790 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
791#endif
792}
793
794/* Say that register REG contains a quantity not in any register before
795 and initialize that quantity. */
796
797static void
798make_new_qty (reg)
799 register int reg;
800{
801 register int q;
802
803 if (next_qty >= max_qty)
804 abort ();
805
806 q = reg_qty[reg] = next_qty++;
807 qty_first_reg[q] = reg;
808 qty_last_reg[q] = reg;
809 qty_const[q] = qty_const_insn[q] = 0;
810 qty_comparison_code[q] = UNKNOWN;
811
812 reg_next_eqv[reg] = reg_prev_eqv[reg] = -1;
813}
814
815/* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
816 OLD is not changing; NEW is. */
817
818static void
819make_regs_eqv (new, old)
820 register int new, old;
821{
822 register int lastr, firstr;
823 register int q = reg_qty[old];
824
825 /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number. */
826 if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old))
827 abort ();
828
829 reg_qty[new] = q;
830 firstr = qty_first_reg[q];
831 lastr = qty_last_reg[q];
832
833 /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything. Prefer pseudo regs to other
834 hard regs. Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
835 of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
836 make it the new canonical replacement for this qty. */
837 if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
838 /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS. This means
839 that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
830a38ee 840 they cannot be used in substitutions or canonicalizations
7afe21cc
RK
841 either. */
842 && (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new) != NO_REGS)
843 && ((new < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new))
844 || (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
845 && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
846 || ((uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]] > cse_basic_block_end
847 || (uid_cuid[regno_first_uid[new]]
848 < cse_basic_block_start))
849 && (uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]]
850 > uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[firstr]]))))))
851 {
852 reg_prev_eqv[firstr] = new;
853 reg_next_eqv[new] = firstr;
854 reg_prev_eqv[new] = -1;
855 qty_first_reg[q] = new;
856 }
857 else
858 {
859 /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
860 Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
861 end. Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
862 equivalent for anything. */
863 while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_prev_eqv[lastr] >= 0
864 && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
865 && new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
866 lastr = reg_prev_eqv[lastr];
867 reg_next_eqv[new] = reg_next_eqv[lastr];
868 if (reg_next_eqv[lastr] >= 0)
869 reg_prev_eqv[reg_next_eqv[lastr]] = new;
870 else
871 qty_last_reg[q] = new;
872 reg_next_eqv[lastr] = new;
873 reg_prev_eqv[new] = lastr;
874 }
875}
876
877/* Remove REG from its equivalence class. */
878
879static void
880delete_reg_equiv (reg)
881 register int reg;
882{
7afe21cc 883 register int q = reg_qty[reg];
a4e262bc 884 register int p, n;
7afe21cc 885
a4e262bc 886 /* If invalid, do nothing. */
7afe21cc
RK
887 if (q == reg)
888 return;
889
a4e262bc
RK
890 p = reg_prev_eqv[reg];
891 n = reg_next_eqv[reg];
892
7afe21cc
RK
893 if (n != -1)
894 reg_prev_eqv[n] = p;
895 else
896 qty_last_reg[q] = p;
897 if (p != -1)
898 reg_next_eqv[p] = n;
899 else
900 qty_first_reg[q] = n;
901
902 reg_qty[reg] = reg;
903}
904
905/* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
906 that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
907
908 Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
909 as subexpressions will be considered valid.
910
911 mention_regs is not called when a register itself
912 is being stored in the table.
913
914 Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
915 of X. */
916
917static int
918mention_regs (x)
919 rtx x;
920{
921 register enum rtx_code code;
922 register int i, j;
923 register char *fmt;
924 register int changed = 0;
925
926 if (x == 0)
e5f6a288 927 return 0;
7afe21cc
RK
928
929 code = GET_CODE (x);
930 if (code == REG)
931 {
932 register int regno = REGNO (x);
933 register int endregno
934 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
935 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)));
936 int i;
937
938 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
939 {
940 if (reg_in_table[i] >= 0 && reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
941 remove_invalid_refs (i);
942
943 reg_in_table[i] = reg_tick[i];
944 }
945
946 return 0;
947 }
948
949 /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
950 that does not have a quantity, give it one. This is so that a later
951 call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
952 hash code and not found in the table after that call.
953
954 It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
955 fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
956 call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
957 use of the register is in the comparison. */
958
959 if (code == COMPARE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
960 {
961 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
962 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
906c4e36 963 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_PTR, 0))
7afe21cc
RK
964 {
965 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
966 changed = 1;
967 }
968
969 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == REG
970 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
906c4e36 971 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_PTR, 0))
7afe21cc
RK
972 {
973 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
974 changed = 1;
975 }
976 }
977
978 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
979 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
980 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
981 changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
982 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
983 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
984 changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
985
986 return changed;
987}
988
989/* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
990 with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
991 (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
992 If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
993 Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
994 before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
995
996 Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
997 so X's hash code may be different. */
998
999static int
1000insert_regs (x, classp, modified)
1001 rtx x;
1002 struct table_elt *classp;
1003 int modified;
1004{
1005 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1006 {
1007 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1008
1ff0c00d
RK
1009 /* If REGNO is in the equivalence table already but is of the
1010 wrong mode for that equivalence, don't do anything here. */
1011
1012 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno)
1013 && qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] != GET_MODE (x))
1014 return 0;
1015
1016 if (modified || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno))
7afe21cc
RK
1017 {
1018 if (classp)
1019 for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
1020 classp != 0;
1021 classp = classp->next_same_value)
1022 if (GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG
1023 && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
1024 {
1025 make_regs_eqv (regno, REGNO (classp->exp));
1026 return 1;
1027 }
1028
1029 make_new_qty (regno);
1030 qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] = GET_MODE (x);
1031 return 1;
1032 }
cdf4112f
TG
1033
1034 return 0;
7afe21cc 1035 }
c610adec
RK
1036
1037 /* If X is a SUBREG, we will likely be inserting the inner register in the
1038 table. If that register doesn't have an assigned quantity number at
1039 this point but does later, the insertion that we will be doing now will
1040 not be accessible because its hash code will have changed. So assign
1041 a quantity number now. */
1042
1043 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG
1044 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))))
1045 {
906c4e36 1046 insert_regs (SUBREG_REG (x), NULL_PTR, 0);
c610adec
RK
1047 mention_regs (SUBREG_REG (x));
1048 return 1;
1049 }
7afe21cc
RK
1050 else
1051 return mention_regs (x);
1052}
1053\f
1054/* Look in or update the hash table. */
1055
1056/* Put the element ELT on the list of free elements. */
1057
1058static void
1059free_element (elt)
1060 struct table_elt *elt;
1061{
1062 elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
1063 free_element_chain = elt;
1064}
1065
1066/* Return an element that is free for use. */
1067
1068static struct table_elt *
1069get_element ()
1070{
1071 struct table_elt *elt = free_element_chain;
1072 if (elt)
1073 {
1074 free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
1075 return elt;
1076 }
1077 n_elements_made++;
1078 return (struct table_elt *) oballoc (sizeof (struct table_elt));
1079}
1080
1081/* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
1082 HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
1083 It's an argument because often that is known in advance
1084 and we save much time not recomputing it. */
1085
1086static void
1087remove_from_table (elt, hash)
1088 register struct table_elt *elt;
2197a88a 1089 unsigned hash;
7afe21cc
RK
1090{
1091 if (elt == 0)
1092 return;
1093
1094 /* Mark this element as removed. See cse_insn. */
1095 elt->first_same_value = 0;
1096
1097 /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class. */
1098
1099 {
1100 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
1101 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
1102
1103 if (next) next->prev_same_value = prev;
1104
1105 if (prev)
1106 prev->next_same_value = next;
1107 else
1108 {
1109 register struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
1110 while (next)
1111 {
1112 next->first_same_value = newfirst;
1113 next = next->next_same_value;
1114 }
1115 }
1116 }
1117
1118 /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket. */
1119
1120 {
1121 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
1122 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
1123
1124 if (next) next->prev_same_hash = prev;
1125
1126 if (prev)
1127 prev->next_same_hash = next;
1128 else if (table[hash] == elt)
1129 table[hash] = next;
1130 else
1131 {
1132 /* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket. This can happen
1133 when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'. Search
1134 for the hash bucket that it heads. This happens only very
1135 rarely, so the cost is acceptable. */
1136 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1137 if (table[hash] == elt)
1138 table[hash] = next;
1139 }
1140 }
1141
1142 /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain. */
1143
1144 if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
1145 {
1146 register struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
1147 while (p->related_value != elt)
1148 p = p->related_value;
1149 p->related_value = elt->related_value;
1150 if (p->related_value == p)
1151 p->related_value = 0;
1152 }
1153
1154 free_element (elt);
1155}
1156
1157/* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
1158 or 0 if X is not in the table.
1159
1160 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1161 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1162
1163 Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
1164 looks like X. */
1165
1166static struct table_elt *
1167lookup (x, hash, mode)
1168 rtx x;
2197a88a 1169 unsigned hash;
7afe21cc
RK
1170 enum machine_mode mode;
1171{
1172 register struct table_elt *p;
1173
1174 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1175 if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1176 || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, GET_CODE (x) != REG, 0)))
1177 return p;
1178
1179 return 0;
1180}
1181
1182/* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
1183 Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register. */
1184
1185static struct table_elt *
1186lookup_for_remove (x, hash, mode)
1187 rtx x;
2197a88a 1188 unsigned hash;
7afe21cc
RK
1189 enum machine_mode mode;
1190{
1191 register struct table_elt *p;
1192
1193 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1194 {
1195 int regno = REGNO (x);
1196 /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
1197 invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0). */
1198 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1199 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
1200 && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
1201 return p;
1202 }
1203 else
1204 {
1205 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1206 if (mode == p->mode && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, 0)))
1207 return p;
1208 }
1209
1210 return 0;
1211}
1212
1213/* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
1214 If one is found, return that expression. */
1215
1216static rtx
1217lookup_as_function (x, code)
1218 rtx x;
1219 enum rtx_code code;
1220{
1221 register struct table_elt *p = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, VOIDmode) % NBUCKETS,
1222 GET_MODE (x));
1223 if (p == 0)
1224 return 0;
1225
1226 for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1227 {
1228 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
1229 /* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table. */
1230 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
1231 return p->exp;
1232 }
1233
1234 return 0;
1235}
1236
1237/* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code
1238 and CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in
1239 (or 0 if a new class should be made).
1240 It is inserted at the proper position to keep the class in
1241 the order cheapest first.
1242
1243 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1244 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1245
1246 For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
1247 goes in front, except that the first element in the list
1248 remains first unless a cheaper element is added. The order of
1249 pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
830a38ee 1250 find the cheapest when a register is retrieved from the table.
7afe21cc
RK
1251
1252 The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
1253 The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
1254
1255 You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
1256 and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
1257 you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
1258
1259 If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities. */
1260
1261#define CHEAPER(X,Y) ((X)->cost < (Y)->cost)
1262
1263static struct table_elt *
1264insert (x, classp, hash, mode)
1265 register rtx x;
1266 register struct table_elt *classp;
2197a88a 1267 unsigned hash;
7afe21cc
RK
1268 enum machine_mode mode;
1269{
1270 register struct table_elt *elt;
1271
1272 /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
1273 something is wrong. */
1274 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
1275 abort ();
1276
1277 /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table. */
1278 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1279 {
1280 int regno = REGNO (x);
1281 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1282 int i;
1283
1284 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1285 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1286 }
1287
1288
1289 /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket. */
1290
1291 elt = get_element ();
1292 elt->exp = x;
1293 elt->cost = COST (x);
1294 elt->next_same_value = 0;
1295 elt->prev_same_value = 0;
1296 elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1297 elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
1298 elt->related_value = 0;
1299 elt->in_memory = 0;
1300 elt->mode = mode;
1301 elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x)
1302 /* GNU C++ takes advantage of this for `this'
1303 (and other const values). */
1304 || (RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x)
1305 && GET_CODE (x) == REG
1306 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1307 || FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P (x));
1308
1309 if (table[hash])
1310 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
1311 table[hash] = elt;
1312
1313 /* Put it into the proper value-class. */
1314 if (classp)
1315 {
1316 classp = classp->first_same_value;
1317 if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
1318 /* Insert at the head of the class */
1319 {
1320 register struct table_elt *p;
1321 elt->next_same_value = classp;
1322 classp->prev_same_value = elt;
1323 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1324
1325 for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1326 p->first_same_value = elt;
1327 }
1328 else
1329 {
1330 /* Insert not at head of the class. */
1331 /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X. */
1332 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1333 for (p = classp; (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
1334 p = next);
1335 /* Put it after P and before NEXT. */
1336 elt->next_same_value = next;
1337 if (next)
1338 next->prev_same_value = elt;
1339 elt->prev_same_value = p;
1340 p->next_same_value = elt;
1341 elt->first_same_value = classp;
1342 }
1343 }
1344 else
1345 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1346
1347 /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
1348 being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
1349
1350 If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
1351 and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register. So
1352 we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
1353 inserted).
1354
1355 If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
1356 constant, we must check the entire class.
1357
1358 If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
1359 update `qty_const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
1360 insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant. */
1361
1362 if (elt->is_const && classp && GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG)
1363 {
1364 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]]
1365 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]], x);
1366 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]] = this_insn;
1367 }
1368
1369 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && classp && ! qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1370 {
1371 register struct table_elt *p;
1372
1373 for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
1374 {
1375 if (p->is_const)
1376 {
1377 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1378 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
1379 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1380 break;
1381 }
1382 }
1383 }
1384
1385 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1386 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1387 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1388
1389 /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
1390 and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
1391 link it up with related expressions. */
1392 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1393 {
1394 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
2197a88a 1395 unsigned subhash;
7afe21cc
RK
1396 struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
1397
1398 if (subexp != 0)
1399 {
1400 /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table. */
1401 subhash = safe_hash (subexp, mode) % NBUCKETS;
1402 subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
1403 if (subelt == 0)
906c4e36 1404 subelt = insert (subexp, NULL_PTR, subhash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
1405 /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none. */
1406 if (subelt->related_value == 0)
1407 subelt->related_value = subelt;
1408 /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT. */
1409 subelt_prev = subelt;
1410 while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
1411 subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
1412 /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
1413 This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one. */
1414 elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
1415 subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
1416 }
1417 }
1418
1419 return elt;
1420}
1421\f
1422/* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
1423 CLASS2 into CLASS1. This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
1424 the two classes equivalent.
1425
1426 CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
1427 call.
1428
1429 Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied. */
1430
1431static void
1432merge_equiv_classes (class1, class2)
1433 struct table_elt *class1, *class2;
1434{
1435 struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new;
1436
1437 /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes. */
1438 class1 = class1->first_same_value;
1439 class2 = class2->first_same_value;
1440
1441 /* If they were already equal, forget it. */
1442 if (class1 == class2)
1443 return;
1444
1445 for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
1446 {
2197a88a 1447 unsigned hash;
7afe21cc
RK
1448 rtx exp = elt->exp;
1449 enum machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
1450
1451 next = elt->next_same_value;
1452
1453 /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
1454 Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
1455 hash code (it also isn't necessary). */
1456 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, 0))
1457 {
1458 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
1459 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
1460 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1461
1462 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG)
1463 delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
1464
1465 remove_from_table (elt, hash);
1466
1467 if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0))
1468 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1469 new = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
1470 new->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1471 new->in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1472 }
1473 }
1474}
1475\f
1476/* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid,
1477 all expressions whose values could be altered by storing in X.
1478 X is a register, a subreg, or a memory reference with nonvarying address
1479 (because, when a memory reference with a varying address is stored in,
1480 all memory references are removed by invalidate_memory
1481 so specific invalidation is superfluous).
1482
1483 A nonvarying address may be just a register or just
1484 a symbol reference, or it may be either of those plus
1485 a numeric offset. */
1486
1487static void
1488invalidate (x)
1489 rtx x;
1490{
1491 register int i;
1492 register struct table_elt *p;
f451db89
JL
1493 rtx base;
1494 HOST_WIDE_INT start, end;
7afe21cc
RK
1495
1496 /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents
1497 are recorded through the qty number mechanism.
1498 Just change the qty number of the register,
1499 mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
1500 and remove it itself. */
1501
1502 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1503 {
1504 register int regno = REGNO (x);
2197a88a 1505 register unsigned hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
7afe21cc
RK
1506
1507 /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
1508 that it's value might have changed. If it is a pseudo, remove its
1509 entry from the hash table.
1510
1511 For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
1512 additional hard registers corresponding to X. Then, if any of these
1513 registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
1514 overlap these registers. */
1515
1516 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1517 reg_tick[regno]++;
1518
1519 if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1520 remove_from_table (lookup_for_remove (x, hash, GET_MODE (x)), hash);
1521 else
1522 {
54b1de55
RK
1523 HOST_WIDE_INT in_table
1524 = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
7afe21cc
RK
1525 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1526 int tregno, tendregno;
1527 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1528
1529 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1530
1531 for (i = regno + 1; i < endregno; i++)
1532 {
1533 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1534 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1535 delete_reg_equiv (i);
1536 reg_tick[i]++;
1537 }
1538
1539 if (in_table)
1540 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1541 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1542 {
1543 next = p->next_same_hash;
1544
1545 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1546 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1547 continue;
1548
1549 tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
1550 tendregno
1551 = tregno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (tregno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1552 if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
1553 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1554 }
1555 }
1556
1557 return;
1558 }
1559
1560 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1561 {
1562 if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != REG)
1563 abort ();
1564 invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x));
1565 return;
1566 }
1567
1568 /* X is not a register; it must be a memory reference with
1569 a nonvarying address. Remove all hash table elements
1570 that refer to overlapping pieces of memory. */
1571
1572 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
1573 abort ();
7afe21cc 1574
f451db89
JL
1575 set_nonvarying_address_components (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)),
1576 &base, &start, &end);
7afe21cc 1577
7afe21cc
RK
1578 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1579 {
1580 register struct table_elt *next;
1581 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1582 {
1583 next = p->next_same_hash;
1584 if (refers_to_mem_p (p->exp, base, start, end))
1585 remove_from_table (p, i);
1586 }
1587 }
1588}
1589
1590/* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
1591 since they are already invalid, and we are about to
1592 mark that register valid again and don't want the old
1593 expressions to reappear as valid. */
1594
1595static void
1596remove_invalid_refs (regno)
1597 int regno;
1598{
1599 register int i;
1600 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1601
1602 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1603 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1604 {
1605 next = p->next_same_hash;
1606 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
906c4e36 1607 && refers_to_regno_p (regno, regno + 1, p->exp, NULL_PTR))
7afe21cc
RK
1608 remove_from_table (p, i);
1609 }
1610}
1611\f
1612/* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
1613 reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
1614
1615 This is called when we make a jump equivalence. */
1616
1617static void
1618rehash_using_reg (x)
1619 rtx x;
1620{
1621 int i;
1622 struct table_elt *p, *next;
2197a88a 1623 unsigned hash;
7afe21cc
RK
1624
1625 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1626 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
1627
1628 /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
1629 valid entries in the table, we have no work to do. */
1630
1631 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG
1632 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] < 0
1633 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] != reg_tick[REGNO (x)])
1634 return;
1635
1636 /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
1637 If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it. We can skip
1638 objects that are registers, since they are handled specially. */
1639
1640 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1641 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1642 {
1643 next = p->next_same_hash;
1644 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG && reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
538b78e7 1645 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)
7afe21cc
RK
1646 && i != (hash = safe_hash (p->exp, p->mode) % NBUCKETS))
1647 {
1648 if (p->next_same_hash)
1649 p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
1650
1651 if (p->prev_same_hash)
1652 p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
1653 else
1654 table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
1655
1656 p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1657 p->prev_same_hash = 0;
1658 if (table[hash])
1659 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
1660 table[hash] = p;
1661 }
1662 }
1663}
1664\f
1665/* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory,
1666 or some of them as specified by *WRITES. */
1667
1668static void
1669invalidate_memory (writes)
1670 struct write_data *writes;
1671{
1672 register int i;
1673 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1674 int all = writes->all;
1675 int nonscalar = writes->nonscalar;
1676
1677 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1678 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1679 {
1680 next = p->next_same_hash;
1681 if (p->in_memory
1682 && (all
1683 || (nonscalar && p->in_struct)
1684 || cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (p->exp)))
1685 remove_from_table (p, i);
1686 }
1687}
1688\f
1689/* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
1690 register. Also update their TICK values. */
1691
1692static void
1693invalidate_for_call ()
1694{
1695 int regno, endregno;
1696 int i;
2197a88a 1697 unsigned hash;
7afe21cc
RK
1698 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1699 int in_table = 0;
1700
1701 /* Go through all the hard registers. For each that is clobbered in
1702 a CALL_INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
1703 reg_tick if defined. Also see if any of these registers is currently
1704 in the table. */
1705
1706 for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; regno++)
1707 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, regno))
1708 {
1709 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1710 if (reg_tick[regno] >= 0)
1711 reg_tick[regno]++;
1712
1713 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1714 }
1715
1716 /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
1717 table, we are done. Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
1718 entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register. */
1719
1720 if (in_table)
1721 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1722 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1723 {
1724 next = p->next_same_hash;
1725
1726 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1727 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1728 continue;
1729
1730 regno = REGNO (p->exp);
1731 endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1732
1733 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1734 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i))
1735 {
1736 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1737 break;
1738 }
1739 }
1740}
1741\f
1742/* Given an expression X of type CONST,
1743 and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
1744 is not in the hash table),
1745 return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
1746 If none can be found, return 0. */
1747
1748static rtx
1749use_related_value (x, elt)
1750 rtx x;
1751 struct table_elt *elt;
1752{
1753 register struct table_elt *relt = 0;
1754 register struct table_elt *p, *q;
906c4e36 1755 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
7afe21cc
RK
1756
1757 /* First, is there anything related known?
1758 If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
1759 Otherwise, must look it up. */
1760
1761 if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
1762 relt = elt;
1763 else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1764 {
1765 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1766 if (subexp != 0)
1767 relt = lookup (subexp,
1768 safe_hash (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)) % NBUCKETS,
1769 GET_MODE (subexp));
1770 }
1771
1772 if (relt == 0)
1773 return 0;
1774
1775 /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
1776 equivalent register. */
1777
1778 p = relt;
1779 while (1)
1780 {
1781 /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
1782 The first is when X is already in the table. Then it is searching
1783 the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT). The second case is when
1784 X is not in the table. Then RELT points to a class for the related
1785 value.
1786
1787 Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
1788 the same value as X. */
1789
1790 if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
1791 q = 0;
1792 else
1793 for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
1794 if (GET_CODE (q->exp) == REG)
1795 break;
1796
1797 if (q)
1798 break;
1799
1800 p = p->related_value;
1801
1802 /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
1803 Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
1804 and it has no related values recorded. */
1805 if (p == relt || p == 0)
1806 break;
1807 }
1808
1809 if (q == 0)
1810 return 0;
1811
1812 offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
1813 /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity. */
1814 return plus_constant (q->exp, offset);
1815}
1816\f
1817/* Hash an rtx. We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
1818 Equivalent registers hash identically.
1819 MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
1820 otherwise the mode of X is used.
1821
1822 Store 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
1823
1824 Store 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a MEM rtx
1825 which does not have the RTX_UNCHANGING_P bit set.
1826 In this case, also store 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
1827 if there is a MEM rtx which has the MEM_IN_STRUCT_P bit set.
1828
1829 Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
1830 is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address. */
1831
2197a88a 1832static unsigned
7afe21cc
RK
1833canon_hash (x, mode)
1834 rtx x;
1835 enum machine_mode mode;
1836{
1837 register int i, j;
2197a88a 1838 register unsigned hash = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
1839 register enum rtx_code code;
1840 register char *fmt;
1841
1842 /* repeat is used to turn tail-recursion into iteration. */
1843 repeat:
1844 if (x == 0)
1845 return hash;
1846
1847 code = GET_CODE (x);
1848 switch (code)
1849 {
1850 case REG:
1851 {
1852 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1853
1854 /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
1855 because extending its life will cause reload problems. We
1856 consider ap, fp, and sp to be fixed for this purpose.
1857 On all machines, we can't record any global registers. */
1858
1859 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1860 && (global_regs[regno]
1861#ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
1862 || (! fixed_regs[regno]
1863 && regno != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
8bc169f2 1864 && regno != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7afe21cc
RK
1865 && regno != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1866 && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
1867#endif
1868 ))
1869 {
1870 do_not_record = 1;
1871 return 0;
1872 }
2197a88a
RK
1873 hash += ((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) reg_qty[regno];
1874 return hash;
7afe21cc
RK
1875 }
1876
1877 case CONST_INT:
2197a88a
RK
1878 {
1879 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT tem = INTVAL (x);
1880 hash += ((unsigned) CONST_INT << 7) + (unsigned) mode + tem;
1881 return hash;
1882 }
7afe21cc
RK
1883
1884 case CONST_DOUBLE:
1885 /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
1886 the integers representing the constant. */
2197a88a
RK
1887 hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x);
1888 for (i = 2; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (CONST_DOUBLE); i++)
1889 {
1890 unsigned tem = XINT (x, i);
1891 hash += tem;
1892 }
7afe21cc
RK
1893 return hash;
1894
1895 /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label. */
1896 case LABEL_REF:
3c543775
RK
1897 hash
1898 += ((unsigned) LABEL_REF << 7) + (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) XEXP (x, 0);
2197a88a 1899 return hash;
7afe21cc
RK
1900
1901 case SYMBOL_REF:
3c543775
RK
1902 hash
1903 += ((unsigned) SYMBOL_REF << 7) + (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) XEXP (x, 0);
2197a88a 1904 return hash;
7afe21cc
RK
1905
1906 case MEM:
1907 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1908 {
1909 do_not_record = 1;
1910 return 0;
1911 }
1912 if (! RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x))
1913 {
1914 hash_arg_in_memory = 1;
1915 if (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x)) hash_arg_in_struct = 1;
1916 }
1917 /* Now that we have already found this special case,
1918 might as well speed it up as much as possible. */
2197a88a 1919 hash += (unsigned) MEM;
7afe21cc
RK
1920 x = XEXP (x, 0);
1921 goto repeat;
1922
1923 case PRE_DEC:
1924 case PRE_INC:
1925 case POST_DEC:
1926 case POST_INC:
1927 case PC:
1928 case CC0:
1929 case CALL:
1930 case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
1931 do_not_record = 1;
1932 return 0;
1933
1934 case ASM_OPERANDS:
1935 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1936 {
1937 do_not_record = 1;
1938 return 0;
1939 }
1940 }
1941
1942 i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
2197a88a 1943 hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x);
7afe21cc
RK
1944 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
1945 for (; i >= 0; i--)
1946 {
1947 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
1948 {
1949 rtx tem = XEXP (x, i);
1950 rtx tem1;
1951
1952 /* If the operand is a REG that is equivalent to a constant, hash
1953 as if we were hashing the constant, since we will be comparing
1954 that way. */
1955 if (tem != 0 && GET_CODE (tem) == REG
1956 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (tem))
1957 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]] == GET_MODE (tem)
1958 && (tem1 = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]]) != 0
1959 && CONSTANT_P (tem1))
1960 tem = tem1;
1961
1962 /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
1963 needed at this level, change it into iteration.
1964 This function is called enough to be worth it. */
1965 if (i == 0)
1966 {
1967 x = tem;
1968 goto repeat;
1969 }
1970 hash += canon_hash (tem, 0);
1971 }
1972 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
1973 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
1974 hash += canon_hash (XVECEXP (x, i, j), 0);
1975 else if (fmt[i] == 's')
1976 {
2197a88a 1977 register unsigned char *p = (unsigned char *) XSTR (x, i);
7afe21cc
RK
1978 if (p)
1979 while (*p)
2197a88a 1980 hash += *p++;
7afe21cc
RK
1981 }
1982 else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
1983 {
2197a88a
RK
1984 register unsigned tem = XINT (x, i);
1985 hash += tem;
7afe21cc
RK
1986 }
1987 else
1988 abort ();
1989 }
1990 return hash;
1991}
1992
1993/* Like canon_hash but with no side effects. */
1994
2197a88a 1995static unsigned
7afe21cc
RK
1996safe_hash (x, mode)
1997 rtx x;
1998 enum machine_mode mode;
1999{
2000 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
2001 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
2002 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
2197a88a 2003 unsigned hash = canon_hash (x, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
2004 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2005 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2006 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2007 return hash;
2008}
2009\f
2010/* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
2011 without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
2012 If VALIDATE is nonzero,
2013 we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
2014 and Y was found in the hash table. We check register refs
2015 in Y for being marked as valid.
2016
2017 If EQUAL_VALUES is nonzero, we allow a register to match a constant value
2018 that is known to be in the register. Ordinarily, we don't allow them
2019 to match, because letting them match would cause unpredictable results
2020 in all the places that search a hash table chain for an equivalent
2021 for a given value. A possible equivalent that has different structure
2022 has its hash code computed from different data. Whether the hash code
2023 is the same as that of the the given value is pure luck. */
2024
2025static int
2026exp_equiv_p (x, y, validate, equal_values)
2027 rtx x, y;
2028 int validate;
2029 int equal_values;
2030{
906c4e36 2031 register int i, j;
7afe21cc
RK
2032 register enum rtx_code code;
2033 register char *fmt;
2034
2035 /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
2036 if VALIDATE is nonzero. */
2037 if (x == y && !validate)
2038 return 1;
2039 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2040 return x == y;
2041
2042 code = GET_CODE (x);
2043 if (code != GET_CODE (y))
2044 {
2045 if (!equal_values)
2046 return 0;
2047
2048 /* If X is a constant and Y is a register or vice versa, they may be
2049 equivalent. We only have to validate if Y is a register. */
2050 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == REG
2051 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (y))
2052 && GET_MODE (y) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]]
2053 && rtx_equal_p (x, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]])
2054 && (! validate || reg_in_table[REGNO (y)] == reg_tick[REGNO (y)]))
2055 return 1;
2056
2057 if (CONSTANT_P (y) && code == REG
2058 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
2059 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
2060 && rtx_equal_p (y, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]))
2061 return 1;
2062
2063 return 0;
2064 }
2065
2066 /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent. */
2067 if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
2068 return 0;
2069
2070 switch (code)
2071 {
2072 case PC:
2073 case CC0:
2074 return x == y;
2075
2076 case CONST_INT:
58c8c593 2077 return INTVAL (x) == INTVAL (y);
7afe21cc
RK
2078
2079 case LABEL_REF:
2080 case SYMBOL_REF:
2081 return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
2082
2083 case REG:
2084 {
2085 int regno = REGNO (y);
2086 int endregno
2087 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
2088 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (y)));
2089 int i;
2090
2091 /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
2092 equivalent. If there are and we are not to validate, they
2093 are equivalent. Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date. */
2094
2095 if (reg_qty[REGNO (x)] != reg_qty[regno])
2096 return 0;
2097
2098 if (! validate)
2099 return 1;
2100
2101 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
2102 if (reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
2103 return 0;
2104
2105 return 1;
2106 }
2107
2108 /* For commutative operations, check both orders. */
2109 case PLUS:
2110 case MULT:
2111 case AND:
2112 case IOR:
2113 case XOR:
2114 case NE:
2115 case EQ:
2116 return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0), validate, equal_values)
2117 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
2118 validate, equal_values))
2119 || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
2120 validate, equal_values)
2121 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
2122 validate, equal_values)));
2123 }
2124
2125 /* Compare the elements. If any pair of corresponding elements
2126 fail to match, return 0 for the whole things. */
2127
2128 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2129 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2130 {
906c4e36 2131 switch (fmt[i])
7afe21cc 2132 {
906c4e36 2133 case 'e':
7afe21cc
RK
2134 if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i), validate, equal_values))
2135 return 0;
906c4e36
RK
2136 break;
2137
2138 case 'E':
7afe21cc
RK
2139 if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
2140 return 0;
2141 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2142 if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
2143 validate, equal_values))
2144 return 0;
906c4e36
RK
2145 break;
2146
2147 case 's':
7afe21cc
RK
2148 if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
2149 return 0;
906c4e36
RK
2150 break;
2151
2152 case 'i':
7afe21cc
RK
2153 if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
2154 return 0;
906c4e36
RK
2155 break;
2156
2157 case 'w':
2158 if (XWINT (x, i) != XWINT (y, i))
2159 return 0;
2160 break;
2161
2162 case '0':
2163 break;
2164
2165 default:
2166 abort ();
7afe21cc 2167 }
906c4e36
RK
2168 }
2169
7afe21cc
RK
2170 return 1;
2171}
2172\f
2173/* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X matches Y.
2174 Here we do not require that X or Y be valid (for registers referred to)
2175 for being in the hash table. */
2176
6cd4575e 2177static int
7afe21cc
RK
2178refers_to_p (x, y)
2179 rtx x, y;
2180{
2181 register int i;
2182 register enum rtx_code code;
2183 register char *fmt;
2184
2185 repeat:
2186 if (x == y)
2187 return 1;
2188 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2189 return 0;
2190
2191 code = GET_CODE (x);
2192 /* If X as a whole has the same code as Y, they may match.
2193 If so, return 1. */
2194 if (code == GET_CODE (y))
2195 {
2196 if (exp_equiv_p (x, y, 0, 1))
2197 return 1;
2198 }
2199
2200 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2201
2202 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2203 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2204 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2205 {
2206 if (i == 0)
2207 {
2208 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2209 goto repeat;
2210 }
2211 else
2212 if (refers_to_p (XEXP (x, i), y))
2213 return 1;
2214 }
2215 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2216 {
2217 int j;
2218 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2219 if (refers_to_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), y))
2220 return 1;
2221 }
2222
2223 return 0;
2224}
2225\f
f451db89
JL
2226/* Given ADDR and SIZE (a memory address, and the size of the memory reference),
2227 set PBASE, PSTART, and PEND which correspond to the base of the address,
2228 the starting offset, and ending offset respectively.
2229
2230 ADDR is known to be a nonvarying address.
2231
2232 cse_address_varies_p returns zero for nonvarying addresses. */
2233
2234static void
2235set_nonvarying_address_components (addr, size, pbase, pstart, pend)
2236 rtx addr;
2237 int size;
2238 rtx *pbase;
6500fb43 2239 HOST_WIDE_INT *pstart, *pend;
f451db89
JL
2240{
2241 rtx base;
2242 int start, end;
2243
2244 base = addr;
2245 start = 0;
2246 end = 0;
2247
2248 /* Registers with nonvarying addresses usually have constant equivalents;
2249 but the frame pointer register is also possible. */
2250 if (GET_CODE (base) == REG
2251 && qty_const != 0
2252 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (base))
2253 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] == GET_MODE (base)
2254 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] != 0)
2255 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]];
2256 else if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2257 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
2258 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 0)) == REG
2259 && qty_const != 0
2260 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (base, 0)))
2261 && (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]]
2262 == GET_MODE (XEXP (base, 0)))
2263 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]])
2264 {
2265 start = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2266 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]];
2267 }
2268
2269 /* By definition, operand1 of a LO_SUM is the associated constant
2270 address. Use the associated constant address as the base instead. */
2271 if (GET_CODE (base) == LO_SUM)
2272 base = XEXP (base, 1);
2273
2274 /* Strip off CONST. */
2275 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
2276 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2277
2278 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2279 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2280 {
2281 start += INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2282 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2283 }
2284
2285 end = start + size;
2286
2287 /* Set the return values. */
2288 *pbase = base;
2289 *pstart = start;
2290 *pend = end;
2291}
2292
7afe21cc
RK
2293/* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X refers to memory
2294 at an address of BASE plus some offset
2295 such that any of the bytes' offsets fall between START (inclusive)
2296 and END (exclusive).
2297
f451db89
JL
2298 The value is undefined if X is a varying address (as determined by
2299 cse_rtx_addr_varies_p). This function is not used in such cases.
7afe21cc
RK
2300
2301 When used in the cse pass, `qty_const' is nonzero, and it is used
2302 to treat an address that is a register with a known constant value
2303 as if it were that constant value.
2304 In the loop pass, `qty_const' is zero, so this is not done. */
2305
f451db89 2306static int
7afe21cc
RK
2307refers_to_mem_p (x, base, start, end)
2308 rtx x, base;
906c4e36 2309 HOST_WIDE_INT start, end;
7afe21cc 2310{
906c4e36 2311 register HOST_WIDE_INT i;
7afe21cc
RK
2312 register enum rtx_code code;
2313 register char *fmt;
2314
2315 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST_INT)
2316 {
2317 start += INTVAL (base);
2318 end += INTVAL (base);
2319 base = const0_rtx;
2320 }
2321
2322 repeat:
2323 if (x == 0)
2324 return 0;
2325
2326 code = GET_CODE (x);
2327 if (code == MEM)
2328 {
2329 register rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0); /* Get the address. */
f451db89 2330 rtx mybase;
6500fb43 2331 HOST_WIDE_INT mystart, myend;
7afe21cc 2332
f451db89
JL
2333 set_nonvarying_address_components (addr, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)),
2334 &mybase, &mystart, &myend);
2335
2336
2337 /* refers_to_mem_p is never called with varying addresses.
2338 If the base addresses are not equal, there is no chance
2339 of the memory addresses conflicting. */
7b0d7bd0 2340 if (! rtx_equal_p (mybase, base))
7afe21cc
RK
2341 return 0;
2342
f451db89 2343 return myend > start && mystart < end;
7afe21cc
RK
2344 }
2345
2346 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2347
2348 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2349 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2350 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2351 {
2352 if (i == 0)
2353 {
2354 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2355 goto repeat;
2356 }
2357 else
2358 if (refers_to_mem_p (XEXP (x, i), base, start, end))
2359 return 1;
2360 }
2361 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2362 {
2363 int j;
2364 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2365 if (refers_to_mem_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), base, start, end))
2366 return 1;
2367 }
2368
2369 return 0;
2370}
2371
2372/* Nonzero if X refers to memory at a varying address;
2373 except that a register which has at the moment a known constant value
2374 isn't considered variable. */
2375
2376static int
2377cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (x)
2378 rtx x;
2379{
2380 /* We need not check for X and the equivalence class being of the same
2381 mode because if X is equivalent to a constant in some mode, it
2382 doesn't vary in any mode. */
2383
2384 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2385 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
2386 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)))
2387 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]]
2388 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]] != 0)
2389 return 0;
2390
2391 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2392 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
2393 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
2394 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == REG
2395 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
2396 && (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
2397 == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2398 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2399 return 0;
2400
2401 return rtx_addr_varies_p (x);
2402}
2403\f
2404/* Canonicalize an expression:
2405 replace each register reference inside it
2406 with the "oldest" equivalent register.
2407
2408 If INSN is non-zero and we are replacing a pseudo with a hard register
7722328e
RK
2409 or vice versa, validate_change is used to ensure that INSN remains valid
2410 after we make our substitution. The calls are made with IN_GROUP non-zero
2411 so apply_change_group must be called upon the outermost return from this
2412 function (unless INSN is zero). The result of apply_change_group can
2413 generally be discarded since the changes we are making are optional. */
7afe21cc
RK
2414
2415static rtx
2416canon_reg (x, insn)
2417 rtx x;
2418 rtx insn;
2419{
2420 register int i;
2421 register enum rtx_code code;
2422 register char *fmt;
2423
2424 if (x == 0)
2425 return x;
2426
2427 code = GET_CODE (x);
2428 switch (code)
2429 {
2430 case PC:
2431 case CC0:
2432 case CONST:
2433 case CONST_INT:
2434 case CONST_DOUBLE:
2435 case SYMBOL_REF:
2436 case LABEL_REF:
2437 case ADDR_VEC:
2438 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
2439 return x;
2440
2441 case REG:
2442 {
2443 register int first;
2444
2445 /* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
2446 in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
2447 of each occurrence. Also, some hard regs appear in
2448 MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered. Don't try to
2449 replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS. */
2450 if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2451 || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
2452 return x;
2453
2454 first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]];
2455 return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
2456 : REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
2457 : gen_rtx (REG, qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]], first));
2458 }
2459 }
2460
2461 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2462 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2463 {
2464 register int j;
2465
2466 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2467 {
2468 rtx new = canon_reg (XEXP (x, i), insn);
2469
2470 /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
178c39f6 2471 insn remains valid. Likewise if the insn has MATCH_DUPs. */
aee9dc31
RS
2472 if (insn != 0 && new != 0
2473 && GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, i)) == REG
178c39f6
RK
2474 && (((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2475 != (REGNO (XEXP (x, i)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
aee9dc31 2476 || insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0))
77fa0940 2477 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), new, 1);
7afe21cc
RK
2478 else
2479 XEXP (x, i) = new;
2480 }
2481 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2482 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2483 XVECEXP (x, i, j) = canon_reg (XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
2484 }
2485
2486 return x;
2487}
2488\f
2489/* LOC is a location with INSN that is an operand address (the contents of
2490 a MEM). Find the best equivalent address to use that is valid for this
2491 insn.
2492
2493 On most CISC machines, complicated address modes are costly, and rtx_cost
2494 is a good approximation for that cost. However, most RISC machines have
2495 only a few (usually only one) memory reference formats. If an address is
2496 valid at all, it is often just as cheap as any other address. Hence, for
2497 RISC machines, we use the configuration macro `ADDRESS_COST' to compare the
2498 costs of various addresses. For two addresses of equal cost, choose the one
2499 with the highest `rtx_cost' value as that has the potential of eliminating
2500 the most insns. For equal costs, we choose the first in the equivalence
2501 class. Note that we ignore the fact that pseudo registers are cheaper
2502 than hard registers here because we would also prefer the pseudo registers.
2503 */
2504
6cd4575e 2505static void
7afe21cc
RK
2506find_best_addr (insn, loc)
2507 rtx insn;
2508 rtx *loc;
2509{
2510 struct table_elt *elt, *p;
2511 rtx addr = *loc;
2512 int our_cost;
2513 int found_better = 1;
2514 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
2515 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
2516 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
7afe21cc
RK
2517 int addr_volatile;
2518 int regno;
2197a88a 2519 unsigned hash;
7afe21cc
RK
2520
2521 /* Do not try to replace constant addresses or addresses of local and
2522 argument slots. These MEM expressions are made only once and inserted
2523 in many instructions, as well as being used to control symbol table
2524 output. It is not safe to clobber them.
2525
2526 There are some uncommon cases where the address is already in a register
2527 for some reason, but we cannot take advantage of that because we have
2528 no easy way to unshare the MEM. In addition, looking up all stack
2529 addresses is costly. */
2530 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2531 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
2532 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
2533 && (regno = REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)),
8bc169f2
DE
2534 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2535 || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
7afe21cc 2536 || (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
8bc169f2
DE
2537 && (regno = REGNO (addr), regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2538 || regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2539 || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
7afe21cc
RK
2540 || CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr))
2541 return;
2542
2543 /* If this address is not simply a register, try to fold it. This will
2544 sometimes simplify the expression. Many simplifications
2545 will not be valid, but some, usually applying the associative rule, will
2546 be valid and produce better code. */
2547 if (GET_CODE (addr) != REG
2548 && validate_change (insn, loc, fold_rtx (addr, insn), 0))
2549 addr = *loc;
2550
42495ca0
RK
2551 /* If this address is not in the hash table, we can't look for equivalences
2552 of the whole address. Also, ignore if volatile. */
2553
7afe21cc 2554 do_not_record = 0;
2197a88a 2555 hash = HASH (addr, Pmode);
7afe21cc
RK
2556 addr_volatile = do_not_record;
2557 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2558 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2559 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2560
2561 if (addr_volatile)
2562 return;
2563
2197a88a 2564 elt = lookup (addr, hash, Pmode);
7afe21cc 2565
7afe21cc 2566#ifndef ADDRESS_COST
42495ca0
RK
2567 if (elt)
2568 {
2569 our_cost = elt->cost;
2570
2571 /* Find the lowest cost below ours that works. */
2572 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
2573 if (elt->cost < our_cost
2574 && (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == REG
2575 || exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
2576 && validate_change (insn, loc,
906c4e36 2577 canon_reg (copy_rtx (elt->exp), NULL_RTX), 0))
42495ca0
RK
2578 return;
2579 }
2580#else
7afe21cc 2581
42495ca0
RK
2582 if (elt)
2583 {
2584 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry
2585 in the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate
2586 choices that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better
2587 one that hasn't already been tried. */
7afe21cc 2588
42495ca0
RK
2589 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2590 p->flag = 0;
7afe21cc 2591
42495ca0
RK
2592 while (found_better)
2593 {
2594 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2595 int best_rtx_cost = (elt->cost + 1) >> 1;
2596 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2597
2598 found_better = 0;
2599 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2600 if (! p->flag
2601 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
2602 || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2603 && (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) < best_addr_cost
2604 || (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) == best_addr_cost
2605 && (p->cost + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2606 {
2607 found_better = 1;
2608 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (p->exp);
2609 best_rtx_cost = (p->cost + 1) >> 1;
2610 best_elt = p;
2611 }
7afe21cc 2612
42495ca0
RK
2613 if (found_better)
2614 {
2615 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
906c4e36
RK
2616 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_elt->exp),
2617 NULL_RTX), 0))
42495ca0
RK
2618 return;
2619 else
2620 best_elt->flag = 1;
2621 }
2622 }
2623 }
7afe21cc 2624
42495ca0
RK
2625 /* If the address is a binary operation with the first operand a register
2626 and the second a constant, do the same as above, but looking for
2627 equivalences of the register. Then try to simplify before checking for
2628 the best address to use. This catches a few cases: First is when we
2629 have REG+const and the register is another REG+const. We can often merge
2630 the constants and eliminate one insn and one register. It may also be
2631 that a machine has a cheap REG+REG+const. Finally, this improves the
2632 code on the Alpha for unaligned byte stores. */
2633
2634 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
2635 && (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*loc)) == '2'
2636 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*loc)) == 'c')
2637 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*loc, 0)) == REG
2638 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*loc, 1)) == CONST_INT)
7afe21cc 2639 {
42495ca0
RK
2640 rtx c = XEXP (*loc, 1);
2641
2642 do_not_record = 0;
2197a88a 2643 hash = HASH (XEXP (*loc, 0), Pmode);
42495ca0
RK
2644 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2645 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2646 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2647
2197a88a 2648 elt = lookup (XEXP (*loc, 0), hash, Pmode);
42495ca0
RK
2649 if (elt == 0)
2650 return;
2651
2652 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry
2653 in the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate
2654 choices that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better
2655 one that hasn't already been tried. */
7afe21cc 2656
7afe21cc 2657 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
42495ca0 2658 p->flag = 0;
7afe21cc 2659
42495ca0 2660 while (found_better)
7afe21cc 2661 {
42495ca0
RK
2662 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2663 int best_rtx_cost = (COST (*loc) + 1) >> 1;
2664 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2665 rtx best_rtx = *loc;
f6516aee
JW
2666 int count;
2667
2668 /* This is at worst case an O(n^2) algorithm, so limit our search
2669 to the first 32 elements on the list. This avoids trouble
2670 compiling code with very long basic blocks that can easily
2671 call cse_gen_binary so many times that we run out of memory. */
42495ca0
RK
2672
2673 found_better = 0;
f6516aee
JW
2674 for (p = elt->first_same_value, count = 0;
2675 p && count < 32;
2676 p = p->next_same_value, count++)
42495ca0
RK
2677 if (! p->flag
2678 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
2679 || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)))
2680 {
96b0e481 2681 rtx new = cse_gen_binary (GET_CODE (*loc), Pmode, p->exp, c);
42495ca0
RK
2682
2683 if ((ADDRESS_COST (new) < best_addr_cost
2684 || (ADDRESS_COST (new) == best_addr_cost
2685 && (COST (new) + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2686 {
2687 found_better = 1;
2688 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (new);
2689 best_rtx_cost = (COST (new) + 1) >> 1;
2690 best_elt = p;
2691 best_rtx = new;
2692 }
2693 }
2694
2695 if (found_better)
2696 {
2697 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
906c4e36
RK
2698 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_rtx),
2699 NULL_RTX), 0))
42495ca0
RK
2700 return;
2701 else
2702 best_elt->flag = 1;
2703 }
7afe21cc
RK
2704 }
2705 }
2706#endif
2707}
2708\f
2709/* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
2710 operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
2711 what values are being compared.
2712
2713 *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
2714 actually being compared. For example, if *PARG1 was (cc0) and *PARG2
2715 was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that were
2716 compared to produce cc0.
2717
2718 The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
2719 A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison. */
2720
2721static enum rtx_code
13c9910f 2722find_comparison_args (code, parg1, parg2, pmode1, pmode2)
7afe21cc
RK
2723 enum rtx_code code;
2724 rtx *parg1, *parg2;
13c9910f 2725 enum machine_mode *pmode1, *pmode2;
7afe21cc
RK
2726{
2727 rtx arg1, arg2;
2728
2729 arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
2730
2731 /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to. */
2732
b2796a4b 2733 while (arg2 == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (arg1)))
7afe21cc
RK
2734 {
2735 /* Set non-zero when we find something of interest. */
2736 rtx x = 0;
2737 int reverse_code = 0;
2738 struct table_elt *p = 0;
2739
2740 /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.
2741 On machines with CC0, this is the only case that can occur, since
2742 fold_rtx will return the COMPARE or item being compared with zero
2743 when given CC0. */
2744
2745 if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
2746 x = arg1;
2747
2748 /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
2749 STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments. */
2750
2751 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (arg1)) == '<')
2752 {
c610adec
RK
2753 if (code == NE
2754 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2755 && code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2756#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2757 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2758 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2759#endif
2760 )
7afe21cc 2761 x = arg1;
c610adec
RK
2762 else if (code == EQ
2763 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2764 && code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2765#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2766 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2767 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2768#endif
2769 )
7afe21cc
RK
2770 x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
2771 }
2772
2773 /* ??? We could also check for
2774
2775 (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
2776
2777 and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring. */
2778
2779 if (x == 0)
2780 /* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
2781 that lets us see what is being compared. */
2782 p = lookup (arg1, safe_hash (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)) % NBUCKETS,
2783 GET_MODE (arg1));
2784 if (p) p = p->first_same_value;
2785
2786 for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2787 {
2788 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
2789
2790 /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it. */
2791 if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2792 continue;
2793
2794 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
2795 /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
2796 that includes the comparison code. In that case, ARG1 would
2797 be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
2798 either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero. If this is an NE operation,
2799 ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
2800 we must reverse ORIG_CODE. On machine with a negative value
2801 for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations. */
2802 || ((code == NE
2803 || (code == LT
c610adec 2804 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
906c4e36
RK
2805 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode)
2806 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7afe21cc 2807 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
906c4e36
RK
2808 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
2809 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
c610adec
RK
2810#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2811 || (code == LT
2812 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2813 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2814#endif
2815 )
7afe21cc
RK
2816 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<'))
2817 {
2818 x = p->exp;
2819 break;
2820 }
2821 else if ((code == EQ
2822 || (code == GE
c610adec 2823 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
906c4e36
RK
2824 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode)
2825 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7afe21cc 2826 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
906c4e36
RK
2827 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
2828 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
c610adec
RK
2829#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2830 || (code == GE
2831 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2832 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2833#endif
2834 )
7afe21cc
RK
2835 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<')
2836 {
2837 reverse_code = 1;
2838 x = p->exp;
2839 break;
2840 }
2841
2842 /* If this is fp + constant, the equivalent is a better operand since
2843 it may let us predict the value of the comparison. */
2844 else if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (p->exp))
2845 {
2846 arg1 = p->exp;
2847 continue;
2848 }
2849 }
2850
2851 /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
2852 Otherwise, set up for the next iteration. */
2853 if (x == 0)
2854 break;
2855
2856 arg1 = XEXP (x, 0), arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
2857 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == '<')
2858 code = GET_CODE (x);
2859
2860 if (reverse_code)
2861 code = reverse_condition (code);
2862 }
2863
13c9910f
RS
2864 /* Return our results. Return the modes from before fold_rtx
2865 because fold_rtx might produce const_int, and then it's too late. */
2866 *pmode1 = GET_MODE (arg1), *pmode2 = GET_MODE (arg2);
7afe21cc
RK
2867 *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
2868
2869 return code;
2870}
2871\f
2872/* Try to simplify a unary operation CODE whose output mode is to be
2873 MODE with input operand OP whose mode was originally OP_MODE.
2874 Return zero if no simplification can be made. */
2875
2876rtx
2877simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, op, op_mode)
2878 enum rtx_code code;
2879 enum machine_mode mode;
2880 rtx op;
2881 enum machine_mode op_mode;
2882{
2883 register int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
2884
2885 /* The order of these tests is critical so that, for example, we don't
2886 check the wrong mode (input vs. output) for a conversion operation,
2887 such as FIX. At some point, this should be simplified. */
2888
2889#if !defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
2890 if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2891 {
2892 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2893
2894#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2895 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), INTVAL (op) < 0 ? ~0 : 0);
2896#else
2897 d = (double) INTVAL (op);
2898#endif
2899 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2900 }
2901 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2902 {
2903 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2904
2905#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2906 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), 0);
2907#else
2908 d = (double) (unsigned int) INTVAL (op);
2909#endif
2910 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2911 }
2912
2913 else if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2914 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2915 {
2916 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2917
2918#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2919 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2920#else
2921 if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) < 0)
2922 {
2923 d = (double) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
906c4e36
RK
2924 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2925 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2926 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op));
7afe21cc
RK
2927 d = (- d - 1.0);
2928 }
2929 else
2930 {
2931 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
906c4e36
RK
2932 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2933 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2934 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
7afe21cc
RK
2935 }
2936#endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2937 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2938 }
2939 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2940 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2941 {
2942 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2943
2944#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2945 REAL_VALUE_FROM_UNSIGNED_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op),
2946 CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2947#else
2948 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
906c4e36
RK
2949 d *= ((double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2))
2950 * (double) ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT / 2)));
2951 d += (double) (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
7afe21cc
RK
2952#endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2953 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2954 }
2955#endif
2956
f89e32e9
RK
2957 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
2958 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && width > 0)
7afe21cc 2959 {
906c4e36
RK
2960 register HOST_WIDE_INT arg0 = INTVAL (op);
2961 register HOST_WIDE_INT val;
7afe21cc
RK
2962
2963 switch (code)
2964 {
2965 case NOT:
2966 val = ~ arg0;
2967 break;
2968
2969 case NEG:
2970 val = - arg0;
2971 break;
2972
2973 case ABS:
2974 val = (arg0 >= 0 ? arg0 : - arg0);
2975 break;
2976
2977 case FFS:
2978 /* Don't use ffs here. Instead, get low order bit and then its
2979 number. If arg0 is zero, this will return 0, as desired. */
2980 arg0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
2981 val = exact_log2 (arg0 & (- arg0)) + 1;
2982 break;
2983
2984 case TRUNCATE:
2985 val = arg0;
2986 break;
2987
2988 case ZERO_EXTEND:
2989 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
2990 op_mode = mode;
82a5e898 2991 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
d80e9fd7
RS
2992 {
2993 /* If we were really extending the mode,
2994 we would have to distinguish between zero-extension
2995 and sign-extension. */
2996 if (width != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode))
2997 abort ();
2998 val = arg0;
2999 }
82a5e898
CH
3000 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3001 val = arg0 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
7afe21cc
RK
3002 else
3003 return 0;
3004 break;
3005
3006 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3007 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
3008 op_mode = mode;
82a5e898 3009 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
d80e9fd7
RS
3010 {
3011 /* If we were really extending the mode,
3012 we would have to distinguish between zero-extension
3013 and sign-extension. */
3014 if (width != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode))
3015 abort ();
3016 val = arg0;
3017 }
f12564b4 3018 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7afe21cc 3019 {
82a5e898
CH
3020 val
3021 = arg0 & ~((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
3022 if (val
3023 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1)))
3024 val -= (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
7afe21cc
RK
3025 }
3026 else
3027 return 0;
3028 break;
3029
d45cf215
RS
3030 case SQRT:
3031 return 0;
3032
7afe21cc
RK
3033 default:
3034 abort ();
3035 }
3036
3037 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
3038 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
3039 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
3040 unsigned value for this mode. */
906c4e36
RK
3041 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3042 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
3043 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
7afe21cc
RK
3044 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
3045
906c4e36 3046 return GEN_INT (val);
7afe21cc
RK
3047 }
3048
3049 /* We can do some operations on integer CONST_DOUBLEs. Also allow
3050 for a DImode operation on a CONST_INT. */
089481a6 3051 else if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode && width == HOST_BITS_PER_INT * 2
7afe21cc
RK
3052 && (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT))
3053 {
906c4e36 3054 HOST_WIDE_INT l1, h1, lv, hv;
7afe21cc
RK
3055
3056 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3057 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
3058 else
3059 l1 = INTVAL (op), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
3060
3061 switch (code)
3062 {
3063 case NOT:
3064 lv = ~ l1;
3065 hv = ~ h1;
3066 break;
3067
3068 case NEG:
3069 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
3070 break;
3071
3072 case ABS:
3073 if (h1 < 0)
3074 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
3075 else
3076 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3077 break;
3078
3079 case FFS:
3080 hv = 0;
3081 if (l1 == 0)
906c4e36 3082 lv = HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT + exact_log2 (h1 & (-h1)) + 1;
7afe21cc
RK
3083 else
3084 lv = exact_log2 (l1 & (-l1)) + 1;
3085 break;
3086
3087 case TRUNCATE:
906c4e36
RK
3088 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3089 return GEN_INT (l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode));
7afe21cc
RK
3090 else
3091 return 0;
3092 break;
3093
f72aed24
RS
3094 case ZERO_EXTEND:
3095 if (op_mode == VOIDmode
906c4e36 3096 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
f72aed24
RS
3097 return 0;
3098
3099 hv = 0;
3100 lv = l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
3101 break;
3102
3103 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3104 if (op_mode == VOIDmode
906c4e36 3105 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
f72aed24
RS
3106 return 0;
3107 else
3108 {
3109 lv = l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
906c4e36
RK
3110 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3111 && (lv & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
3112 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1))) != 0)
3113 lv -= (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
f72aed24 3114
906c4e36 3115 hv = (lv < 0) ? ~ (HOST_WIDE_INT) 0 : 0;
f72aed24
RS
3116 }
3117 break;
3118
d45cf215
RS
3119 case SQRT:
3120 return 0;
3121
7afe21cc
RK
3122 default:
3123 return 0;
3124 }
3125
3126 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
3127 }
3128
3129#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3130 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
3131 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
3132 {
3133 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3134 jmp_buf handler;
3135 rtx x;
3136
3137 if (setjmp (handler))
3138 /* There used to be a warning here, but that is inadvisable.
3139 People may want to cause traps, and the natural way
3140 to do it should not get a warning. */
3141 return 0;
3142
3143 set_float_handler (handler);
3144
3145 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
3146
3147 switch (code)
3148 {
3149 case NEG:
3150 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
3151 break;
3152
3153 case ABS:
8b3686ed 3154 if (REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (d))
7afe21cc
RK
3155 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
3156 break;
3157
3158 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
d3159aee 3159 d = real_value_truncate (mode, d);
7afe21cc
RK
3160 break;
3161
3162 case FLOAT_EXTEND:
3163 /* All this does is change the mode. */
3164 break;
3165
3166 case FIX:
d3159aee 3167 d = REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (d);
7afe21cc
RK
3168 break;
3169
3170 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
d3159aee 3171 d = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (d);
7afe21cc
RK
3172 break;
3173
d45cf215
RS
3174 case SQRT:
3175 return 0;
3176
7afe21cc
RK
3177 default:
3178 abort ();
3179 }
3180
560c94a2 3181 x = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
906c4e36 3182 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
7afe21cc
RK
3183 return x;
3184 }
3185 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
906c4e36 3186 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && width > 0)
7afe21cc
RK
3187 {
3188 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3189 jmp_buf handler;
906c4e36 3190 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
7afe21cc
RK
3191
3192 if (setjmp (handler))
3193 return 0;
3194
3195 set_float_handler (handler);
3196
3197 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
3198
3199 switch (code)
3200 {
3201 case FIX:
3202 val = REAL_VALUE_FIX (d);
3203 break;
3204
3205 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
3206 val = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (d);
3207 break;
3208
3209 default:
3210 abort ();
3211 }
3212
906c4e36 3213 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
7afe21cc
RK
3214
3215 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
3216 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
3217 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
3218 unsigned value for this mode. */
906c4e36
RK
3219 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
3220 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
3221 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
3222 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
7afe21cc 3223
906c4e36 3224 return GEN_INT (val);
7afe21cc
RK
3225 }
3226#endif
a6acbe15
RS
3227 /* This was formerly used only for non-IEEE float.
3228 eggert@twinsun.com says it is safe for IEEE also. */
3229 else
7afe21cc
RK
3230 {
3231 /* There are some simplifications we can do even if the operands
a6acbe15 3232 aren't constant. */
7afe21cc
RK
3233 switch (code)
3234 {
3235 case NEG:
3236 case NOT:
3237 /* (not (not X)) == X, similarly for NEG. */
3238 if (GET_CODE (op) == code)
3239 return XEXP (op, 0);
3240 break;
3241
3242 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3243 /* (sign_extend (truncate (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2))))
3244 becomes just the MINUS if its mode is MODE. This allows
3245 folding switch statements on machines using casesi (such as
3246 the Vax). */
3247 if (GET_CODE (op) == TRUNCATE
3248 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == mode
3249 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == MINUS
3250 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
3251 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
3252 return XEXP (op, 0);
3253 break;
3254 }
3255
3256 return 0;
3257 }
7afe21cc
RK
3258}
3259\f
3260/* Simplify a binary operation CODE with result mode MODE, operating on OP0
3261 and OP1. Return 0 if no simplification is possible.
3262
3263 Don't use this for relational operations such as EQ or LT.
3264 Use simplify_relational_operation instead. */
3265
3266rtx
3267simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
3268 enum rtx_code code;
3269 enum machine_mode mode;
3270 rtx op0, op1;
3271{
906c4e36
RK
3272 register HOST_WIDE_INT arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
3273 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
7afe21cc 3274 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
96b0e481 3275 rtx tem;
7afe21cc
RK
3276
3277 /* Relational operations don't work here. We must know the mode
3278 of the operands in order to do the comparison correctly.
3279 Assuming a full word can give incorrect results.
3280 Consider comparing 128 with -128 in QImode. */
3281
3282 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
3283 abort ();
3284
3285#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3286 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
3287 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3288 && mode == GET_MODE (op0) && mode == GET_MODE (op1))
3289 {
3290 REAL_VALUE_TYPE f0, f1, value;
3291 jmp_buf handler;
3292
3293 if (setjmp (handler))
3294 return 0;
3295
3296 set_float_handler (handler);
3297
3298 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f0, op0);
3299 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f1, op1);
5352b11a
RS
3300 f0 = real_value_truncate (mode, f0);
3301 f1 = real_value_truncate (mode, f1);
7afe21cc
RK
3302
3303#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
d3159aee 3304 REAL_ARITHMETIC (value, rtx_to_tree_code (code), f0, f1);
7afe21cc
RK
3305#else
3306 switch (code)
3307 {
3308 case PLUS:
3309 value = f0 + f1;
3310 break;
3311 case MINUS:
3312 value = f0 - f1;
3313 break;
3314 case MULT:
3315 value = f0 * f1;
3316 break;
3317 case DIV:
3318#ifndef REAL_INFINITY
3319 if (f1 == 0)
21d12b80 3320 return 0;
7afe21cc
RK
3321#endif
3322 value = f0 / f1;
3323 break;
3324 case SMIN:
3325 value = MIN (f0, f1);
3326 break;
3327 case SMAX:
3328 value = MAX (f0, f1);
3329 break;
3330 default:
3331 abort ();
3332 }
3333#endif
3334
5352b11a 3335 value = real_value_truncate (mode, value);
831522a4 3336 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
560c94a2 3337 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (value, mode);
7afe21cc 3338 }
6076248a 3339#endif /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
7afe21cc
RK
3340
3341 /* We can fold some multi-word operations. */
6076248a 3342 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
33085906 3343 && width == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT * 2
fe873240 3344 && (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
6076248a 3345 && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
7afe21cc 3346 {
906c4e36 3347 HOST_WIDE_INT l1, l2, h1, h2, lv, hv;
7afe21cc 3348
fe873240
RK
3349 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3350 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
3351 else
3352 l1 = INTVAL (op0), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
7afe21cc
RK
3353
3354 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3355 l2 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1), h2 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
3356 else
3357 l2 = INTVAL (op1), h2 = l2 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
3358
3359 switch (code)
3360 {
3361 case MINUS:
3362 /* A - B == A + (-B). */
3363 neg_double (l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3364 l2 = lv, h2 = hv;
3365
3366 /* .. fall through ... */
3367
3368 case PLUS:
3369 add_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3370 break;
3371
3372 case MULT:
3373 mul_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3374 break;
3375
3376 case DIV: case MOD: case UDIV: case UMOD:
3377 /* We'd need to include tree.h to do this and it doesn't seem worth
3378 it. */
3379 return 0;
3380
3381 case AND:
3382 lv = l1 & l2, hv = h1 & h2;
3383 break;
3384
3385 case IOR:
3386 lv = l1 | l2, hv = h1 | h2;
3387 break;
3388
3389 case XOR:
3390 lv = l1 ^ l2, hv = h1 ^ h2;
3391 break;
3392
3393 case SMIN:
906c4e36
RK
3394 if (h1 < h2
3395 || (h1 == h2
3396 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3397 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
7afe21cc
RK
3398 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3399 else
3400 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3401 break;
3402
3403 case SMAX:
906c4e36
RK
3404 if (h1 > h2
3405 || (h1 == h2
3406 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3407 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
7afe21cc
RK
3408 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3409 else
3410 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3411 break;
3412
3413 case UMIN:
906c4e36
RK
3414 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h1 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h2
3415 || (h1 == h2
3416 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3417 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
7afe21cc
RK
3418 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3419 else
3420 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3421 break;
3422
3423 case UMAX:
906c4e36
RK
3424 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h1 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) h2
3425 || (h1 == h2
3426 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l1
3427 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) l2)))
7afe21cc
RK
3428 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3429 else
3430 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3431 break;
3432
3433 case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
45620ed4 3434 case ASHIFT:
7afe21cc
RK
3435 case ROTATE: case ROTATERT:
3436#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
85c0a556
RK
3437 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
3438 l2 &= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1), h2 = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
3439#endif
3440
3441 if (h2 != 0 || l2 < 0 || l2 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
3442 return 0;
3443
3444 if (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
3445 rshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3446 code == ASHIFTRT);
45620ed4
RK
3447 else if (code == ASHIFT)
3448 lshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv, 1);
7afe21cc
RK
3449 else if (code == ROTATE)
3450 lrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3451 else /* code == ROTATERT */
3452 rrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3453 break;
3454
3455 default:
3456 return 0;
3457 }
3458
3459 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
3460 }
7afe21cc
RK
3461
3462 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
906c4e36 3463 || width > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT || width == 0)
7afe21cc
RK
3464 {
3465 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
3466 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
3467
3468 switch (code)
3469 {
3470 case PLUS:
3471 /* In IEEE floating point, x+0 is not the same as x. Similarly
3472 for the other optimizations below. */
3473 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
a83afb65 3474 && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) && ! flag_fast_math)
7afe21cc
RK
3475 break;
3476
3477 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3478 return op0;
3479
7afe21cc
RK
3480 /* ((-a) + b) -> (b - a) and similarly for (a + (-b)) */
3481 if (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG)
96b0e481 3482 return cse_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
7afe21cc 3483 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
96b0e481 3484 return cse_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
7afe21cc 3485
96b0e481
RK
3486 /* Handle both-operands-constant cases. We can only add
3487 CONST_INTs to constants since the sum of relocatable symbols
fe873240
RK
3488 can't be handled by most assemblers. Don't add CONST_INT
3489 to CONST_INT since overflow won't be computed properly if wider
3490 than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT. */
7afe21cc 3491
fe873240
RK
3492 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && GET_MODE (op0) != VOIDmode
3493 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
96b0e481 3494 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
fe873240
RK
3495 else if (CONSTANT_P (op1) && GET_MODE (op1) != VOIDmode
3496 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
96b0e481 3497 return plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (op0));
7afe21cc 3498
30d69925
RK
3499 /* See if this is something like X * C - X or vice versa or
3500 if the multiplication is written as a shift. If so, we can
3501 distribute and make a new multiply, shift, or maybe just
3502 have X (if C is 2 in the example above). But don't make
3503 real multiply if we didn't have one before. */
3504
3505 if (! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
3506 {
3507 HOST_WIDE_INT coeff0 = 1, coeff1 = 1;
3508 rtx lhs = op0, rhs = op1;
3509 int had_mult = 0;
3510
3511 if (GET_CODE (lhs) == NEG)
3512 coeff0 = -1, lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3513 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == MULT
3514 && GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3515 {
3516 coeff0 = INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3517 had_mult = 1;
3518 }
3519 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == ASHIFT
3520 && GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs, 1)) == CONST_INT
3521 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) >= 0
3522 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3523 {
3524 coeff0 = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1) << INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1));
3525 lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3526 }
3527
3528 if (GET_CODE (rhs) == NEG)
3529 coeff1 = -1, rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3530 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == MULT
3531 && GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3532 {
3533 coeff1 = INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3534 had_mult = 1;
3535 }
3536 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == ASHIFT
3537 && GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs, 1)) == CONST_INT
3538 && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)) >= 0
3539 && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3540 {
3541 coeff1 = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1) << INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1));
3542 rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3543 }
3544
3545 if (rtx_equal_p (lhs, rhs))
3546 {
3547 tem = cse_gen_binary (MULT, mode, lhs,
3548 GEN_INT (coeff0 + coeff1));
3549 return (GET_CODE (tem) == MULT && ! had_mult) ? 0 : tem;
3550 }
3551 }
3552
96b0e481
RK
3553 /* If one of the operands is a PLUS or a MINUS, see if we can
3554 simplify this by the associative law.
3555 Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3556 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3557 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
7afe21cc 3558
cbf6a543 3559 if (INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode)
96b0e481
RK
3560 && (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3561 || GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS)
3562 && (tem = simplify_plus_minus (code, mode, op0, op1)) != 0)
3563 return tem;
7afe21cc
RK
3564 break;
3565
3566 case COMPARE:
3567#ifdef HAVE_cc0
3568 /* Convert (compare FOO (const_int 0)) to FOO unless we aren't
3569 using cc0, in which case we want to leave it as a COMPARE
3570 so we can distinguish it from a register-register-copy.
3571
3572 In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x. */
3573
3574 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
a83afb65 3575 || ! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || flag_fast_math)
7afe21cc
RK
3576 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3577 return op0;
3578#else
3579 /* Do nothing here. */
3580#endif
3581 break;
3582
3583 case MINUS:
21648b45
RK
3584 /* None of these optimizations can be done for IEEE
3585 floating point. */
3586 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
a83afb65 3587 && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) && ! flag_fast_math)
21648b45
RK
3588 break;
3589
a83afb65
RK
3590 /* We can't assume x-x is 0 even with non-IEEE floating point,
3591 but since it is zero except in very strange circumstances, we
3592 will treat it as zero with -ffast-math. */
7afe21cc
RK
3593 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
3594 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
a83afb65
RK
3595 && (! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || flag_fast_math))
3596 return CONST0_RTX (mode);
7afe21cc
RK
3597
3598 /* Change subtraction from zero into negation. */
3599 if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3600 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op1);
3601
96b0e481
RK
3602 /* (-1 - a) is ~a. */
3603 if (op0 == constm1_rtx)
3604 return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op1);
3605
7afe21cc
RK
3606 /* Subtracting 0 has no effect. */
3607 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3608 return op0;
3609
30d69925
RK
3610 /* See if this is something like X * C - X or vice versa or
3611 if the multiplication is written as a shift. If so, we can
3612 distribute and make a new multiply, shift, or maybe just
3613 have X (if C is 2 in the example above). But don't make
3614 real multiply if we didn't have one before. */
3615
3616 if (! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
3617 {
3618 HOST_WIDE_INT coeff0 = 1, coeff1 = 1;
3619 rtx lhs = op0, rhs = op1;
3620 int had_mult = 0;
3621
3622 if (GET_CODE (lhs) == NEG)
3623 coeff0 = -1, lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3624 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == MULT
3625 && GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3626 {
3627 coeff0 = INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3628 had_mult = 1;
3629 }
3630 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == ASHIFT
3631 && GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs, 1)) == CONST_INT
3632 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) >= 0
3633 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3634 {
3635 coeff0 = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1) << INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1));
3636 lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0);
3637 }
3638
3639 if (GET_CODE (rhs) == NEG)
3640 coeff1 = - 1, rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3641 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == MULT
3642 && GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3643 {
3644 coeff1 = INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3645 had_mult = 1;
3646 }
3647 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == ASHIFT
3648 && GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs, 1)) == CONST_INT
3649 && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)) >= 0
3650 && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
3651 {
3652 coeff1 = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1) << INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1));
3653 rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
3654 }
3655
3656 if (rtx_equal_p (lhs, rhs))
3657 {
3658 tem = cse_gen_binary (MULT, mode, lhs,
3659 GEN_INT (coeff0 - coeff1));
3660 return (GET_CODE (tem) == MULT && ! had_mult) ? 0 : tem;
3661 }
3662 }
3663
7afe21cc
RK
3664 /* (a - (-b)) -> (a + b). */
3665 if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
96b0e481 3666 return cse_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
7afe21cc 3667
96b0e481
RK
3668 /* If one of the operands is a PLUS or a MINUS, see if we can
3669 simplify this by the associative law.
3670 Don't use the associative law for floating point.
7afe21cc
RK
3671 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3672 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
7afe21cc 3673
cbf6a543 3674 if (INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode)
96b0e481
RK
3675 && (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3676 || GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS)
3677 && (tem = simplify_plus_minus (code, mode, op0, op1)) != 0)
3678 return tem;
7afe21cc
RK
3679
3680 /* Don't let a relocatable value get a negative coeff. */
fe873240 3681 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT && GET_MODE (op1) != VOIDmode)
7afe21cc
RK
3682 return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
3683 break;
3684
3685 case MULT:
3686 if (op1 == constm1_rtx)
3687 {
96b0e481 3688 tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op0, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
3689
3690 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3691 }
3692
3693 /* In IEEE floating point, x*0 is not always 0. */
3694 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
a83afb65 3695 || ! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || flag_fast_math)
7afe21cc
RK
3696 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3697 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3698 return op1;
3699
3700 /* In IEEE floating point, x*1 is not equivalent to x for nans.
3701 However, ANSI says we can drop signals,
3702 so we can do this anyway. */
3703 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3704 return op0;
3705
c407b802
RK
3706 /* Convert multiply by constant power of two into shift unless
3707 we are still generating RTL. This test is a kludge. */
7afe21cc 3708 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
c407b802
RK
3709 && (val = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) >= 0
3710 && ! rtx_equal_function_value_matters)
906c4e36 3711 return gen_rtx (ASHIFT, mode, op0, GEN_INT (val));
7afe21cc
RK
3712
3713 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3714 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT)
3715 {
3716 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
5a3d4bef
RK
3717 jmp_buf handler;
3718 int op1is2, op1ism1;
3719
3720 if (setjmp (handler))
3721 return 0;
3722
3723 set_float_handler (handler);
7afe21cc 3724 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
5a3d4bef
RK
3725 op1is2 = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst2);
3726 op1ism1 = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconstm1);
3727 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
7afe21cc
RK
3728
3729 /* x*2 is x+x and x*(-1) is -x */
5a3d4bef 3730 if (op1is2 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
7afe21cc
RK
3731 return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, copy_rtx (op0));
3732
5a3d4bef 3733 else if (op1ism1 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
7afe21cc
RK
3734 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3735 }
3736 break;
3737
3738 case IOR:
3739 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3740 return op0;
3741 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3742 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3743 return op1;
3744 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3745 return op0;
3746 /* A | (~A) -> -1 */
3747 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3748 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
31dcf83f 3749 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
8e7e5365 3750 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
7afe21cc
RK
3751 return constm1_rtx;
3752 break;
3753
3754 case XOR:
3755 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3756 return op0;
3757 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3758 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3759 return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op0);
31dcf83f 3760 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
8e7e5365 3761 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
7afe21cc
RK
3762 return const0_rtx;
3763 break;
3764
3765 case AND:
3766 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3767 return const0_rtx;
3768 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3769 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3770 return op0;
31dcf83f 3771 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
8e7e5365 3772 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
7afe21cc
RK
3773 return op0;
3774 /* A & (~A) -> 0 */
3775 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3776 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
709ab4fc 3777 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
8e7e5365 3778 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
7afe21cc
RK
3779 return const0_rtx;
3780 break;
3781
3782 case UDIV:
3783 /* Convert divide by power of two into shift (divide by 1 handled
3784 below). */
3785 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3786 && (arg1 = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) > 0)
906c4e36 3787 return gen_rtx (LSHIFTRT, mode, op0, GEN_INT (arg1));
7afe21cc
RK
3788
3789 /* ... fall through ... */
3790
3791 case DIV:
3792 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3793 return op0;
e7a522ba
RS
3794
3795 /* In IEEE floating point, 0/x is not always 0. */
3796 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
a83afb65 3797 || ! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || flag_fast_math)
e7a522ba
RS
3798 && op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3799 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
7afe21cc 3800 return op0;
e7a522ba 3801
7afe21cc 3802#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
a83afb65
RK
3803 /* Change division by a constant into multiplication. Only do
3804 this with -ffast-math until an expert says it is safe in
3805 general. */
7afe21cc
RK
3806 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3807 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT
a83afb65
RK
3808 && op1 != CONST0_RTX (mode)
3809 && flag_fast_math)
7afe21cc
RK
3810 {
3811 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3812 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
a83afb65
RK
3813
3814 if (! REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst0))
3815 {
7afe21cc 3816#if defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
a83afb65
RK
3817 REAL_ARITHMETIC (d, rtx_to_tree_code (DIV), dconst1, d);
3818 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3819 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode));
7afe21cc 3820#else
a83afb65
RK
3821 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3822 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (1./d, mode));
7afe21cc 3823#endif
a83afb65
RK
3824 }
3825 }
7afe21cc
RK
3826#endif
3827 break;
3828
3829 case UMOD:
3830 /* Handle modulus by power of two (mod with 1 handled below). */
3831 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3832 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1)) > 0)
906c4e36 3833 return gen_rtx (AND, mode, op0, GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1) - 1));
7afe21cc
RK
3834
3835 /* ... fall through ... */
3836
3837 case MOD:
3838 if ((op0 == const0_rtx || op1 == const1_rtx)
3839 && ! side_effects_p (op0) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3840 return const0_rtx;
3841 break;
3842
3843 case ROTATERT:
3844 case ROTATE:
3845 /* Rotating ~0 always results in ~0. */
906c4e36 3846 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7afe21cc
RK
3847 && INTVAL (op0) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
3848 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3849 return op0;
3850
3851 /* ... fall through ... */
3852
7afe21cc
RK
3853 case ASHIFT:
3854 case ASHIFTRT:
3855 case LSHIFTRT:
3856 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3857 return op0;
3858 if (op0 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3859 return op0;
3860 break;
3861
3862 case SMIN:
906c4e36
RK
3863 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3864 && INTVAL (op1) == (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width -1)
7afe21cc
RK
3865 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3866 return op1;
3867 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3868 return op0;
3869 break;
3870
3871 case SMAX:
906c4e36 3872 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
dbbe6445
RK
3873 && (INTVAL (op1)
3874 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1)
7afe21cc
RK
3875 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3876 return op1;
3877 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3878 return op0;
3879 break;
3880
3881 case UMIN:
3882 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3883 return op1;
3884 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3885 return op0;
3886 break;
3887
3888 case UMAX:
3889 if (op1 == constm1_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3890 return op1;
3891 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3892 return op0;
3893 break;
3894
3895 default:
3896 abort ();
3897 }
3898
3899 return 0;
3900 }
3901
3902 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
3903 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
3904
3905 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
3906 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
3907
906c4e36 3908 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7afe21cc 3909 {
906c4e36
RK
3910 arg0 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
3911 arg1 &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
7afe21cc
RK
3912
3913 arg0s = arg0;
906c4e36
RK
3914 if (arg0s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
3915 arg0s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
7afe21cc
RK
3916
3917 arg1s = arg1;
906c4e36
RK
3918 if (arg1s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
3919 arg1s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
7afe21cc
RK
3920 }
3921 else
3922 {
3923 arg0s = arg0;
3924 arg1s = arg1;
3925 }
3926
3927 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
3928
3929 switch (code)
3930 {
3931 case PLUS:
538b78e7 3932 val = arg0s + arg1s;
7afe21cc
RK
3933 break;
3934
3935 case MINUS:
538b78e7 3936 val = arg0s - arg1s;
7afe21cc
RK
3937 break;
3938
3939 case MULT:
3940 val = arg0s * arg1s;
3941 break;
3942
3943 case DIV:
3944 if (arg1s == 0)
3945 return 0;
3946 val = arg0s / arg1s;
3947 break;
3948
3949 case MOD:
3950 if (arg1s == 0)
3951 return 0;
3952 val = arg0s % arg1s;
3953 break;
3954
3955 case UDIV:
3956 if (arg1 == 0)
3957 return 0;
906c4e36 3958 val = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0 / arg1;
7afe21cc
RK
3959 break;
3960
3961 case UMOD:
3962 if (arg1 == 0)
3963 return 0;
906c4e36 3964 val = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0 % arg1;
7afe21cc
RK
3965 break;
3966
3967 case AND:
3968 val = arg0 & arg1;
3969 break;
3970
3971 case IOR:
3972 val = arg0 | arg1;
3973 break;
3974
3975 case XOR:
3976 val = arg0 ^ arg1;
3977 break;
3978
3979 case LSHIFTRT:
3980 /* If shift count is undefined, don't fold it; let the machine do
3981 what it wants. But truncate it if the machine will do that. */
3982 if (arg1 < 0)
3983 return 0;
3984
3985#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
85c0a556 3986 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
4d61f8c5 3987 arg1 %= width;
7afe21cc
RK
3988#endif
3989
906c4e36 3990 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> arg1;
7afe21cc
RK
3991 break;
3992
3993 case ASHIFT:
7afe21cc
RK
3994 if (arg1 < 0)
3995 return 0;
3996
3997#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
85c0a556 3998 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
4d61f8c5 3999 arg1 %= width;
7afe21cc
RK
4000#endif
4001
906c4e36 4002 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << arg1;
7afe21cc
RK
4003 break;
4004
4005 case ASHIFTRT:
4006 if (arg1 < 0)
4007 return 0;
4008
4009#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
85c0a556 4010 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
4d61f8c5 4011 arg1 %= width;
7afe21cc
RK
4012#endif
4013
7afe21cc 4014 val = arg0s >> arg1;
2166571b
RS
4015
4016 /* Bootstrap compiler may not have sign extended the right shift.
4017 Manually extend the sign to insure bootstrap cc matches gcc. */
4018 if (arg0s < 0 && arg1 > 0)
4019 val |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) -1) << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT - arg1);
4020
7afe21cc
RK
4021 break;
4022
4023 case ROTATERT:
4024 if (arg1 < 0)
4025 return 0;
4026
4027 arg1 %= width;
906c4e36
RK
4028 val = ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << (width - arg1))
4029 | (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> arg1));
7afe21cc
RK
4030 break;
4031
4032 case ROTATE:
4033 if (arg1 < 0)
4034 return 0;
4035
4036 arg1 %= width;
906c4e36
RK
4037 val = ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) << arg1)
4038 | (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0) >> (width - arg1)));
7afe21cc
RK
4039 break;
4040
4041 case COMPARE:
4042 /* Do nothing here. */
4043 return 0;
4044
830a38ee
RS
4045 case SMIN:
4046 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
4047 break;
4048
4049 case UMIN:
906c4e36
RK
4050 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0
4051 <= (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1 ? arg0 : arg1);
830a38ee
RS
4052 break;
4053
4054 case SMAX:
4055 val = arg0s > arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
4056 break;
4057
4058 case UMAX:
906c4e36
RK
4059 val = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg0
4060 > (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) arg1 ? arg0 : arg1);
830a38ee
RS
4061 break;
4062
7afe21cc
RK
4063 default:
4064 abort ();
4065 }
4066
4067 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
4068 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
4069 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
906c4e36
RK
4070 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4071 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
4072 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
4073 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4074
4075 return GEN_INT (val);
7afe21cc
RK
4076}
4077\f
96b0e481
RK
4078/* Simplify a PLUS or MINUS, at least one of whose operands may be another
4079 PLUS or MINUS.
4080
4081 Rather than test for specific case, we do this by a brute-force method
4082 and do all possible simplifications until no more changes occur. Then
4083 we rebuild the operation. */
4084
4085static rtx
4086simplify_plus_minus (code, mode, op0, op1)
4087 enum rtx_code code;
4088 enum machine_mode mode;
4089 rtx op0, op1;
4090{
4091 rtx ops[8];
4092 int negs[8];
4093 rtx result, tem;
fb5c8ce6 4094 int n_ops = 2, input_ops = 2, input_consts = 0, n_consts = 0;
96b0e481 4095 int first = 1, negate = 0, changed;
fb5c8ce6 4096 int i, j;
96b0e481
RK
4097
4098 bzero (ops, sizeof ops);
4099
4100 /* Set up the two operands and then expand them until nothing has been
4101 changed. If we run out of room in our array, give up; this should
4102 almost never happen. */
4103
4104 ops[0] = op0, ops[1] = op1, negs[0] = 0, negs[1] = (code == MINUS);
4105
4106 changed = 1;
4107 while (changed)
4108 {
4109 changed = 0;
4110
4111 for (i = 0; i < n_ops; i++)
4112 switch (GET_CODE (ops[i]))
4113 {
4114 case PLUS:
4115 case MINUS:
4116 if (n_ops == 7)
4117 return 0;
4118
4119 ops[n_ops] = XEXP (ops[i], 1);
4120 negs[n_ops++] = GET_CODE (ops[i]) == MINUS ? !negs[i] : negs[i];
4121 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
b7d9299b 4122 input_ops++;
96b0e481
RK
4123 changed = 1;
4124 break;
4125
4126 case NEG:
4127 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
4128 negs[i] = ! negs[i];
4129 changed = 1;
4130 break;
4131
4132 case CONST:
4133 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
fb5c8ce6 4134 input_consts++;
96b0e481
RK
4135 changed = 1;
4136 break;
4137
4138 case NOT:
4139 /* ~a -> (-a - 1) */
4140 if (n_ops != 7)
4141 {
4142 ops[n_ops] = constm1_rtx;
5931019b 4143 negs[n_ops++] = negs[i];
96b0e481
RK
4144 ops[i] = XEXP (ops[i], 0);
4145 negs[i] = ! negs[i];
4146 changed = 1;
4147 }
4148 break;
4149
4150 case CONST_INT:
4151 if (negs[i])
4152 ops[i] = GEN_INT (- INTVAL (ops[i])), negs[i] = 0, changed = 1;
4153 break;
4154 }
4155 }
4156
4157 /* If we only have two operands, we can't do anything. */
4158 if (n_ops <= 2)
4159 return 0;
4160
4161 /* Now simplify each pair of operands until nothing changes. The first
4162 time through just simplify constants against each other. */
4163
4164 changed = 1;
4165 while (changed)
4166 {
4167 changed = first;
4168
4169 for (i = 0; i < n_ops - 1; i++)
4170 for (j = i + 1; j < n_ops; j++)
4171 if (ops[i] != 0 && ops[j] != 0
4172 && (! first || (CONSTANT_P (ops[i]) && CONSTANT_P (ops[j]))))
4173 {
4174 rtx lhs = ops[i], rhs = ops[j];
4175 enum rtx_code ncode = PLUS;
4176
4177 if (negs[i] && ! negs[j])
4178 lhs = ops[j], rhs = ops[i], ncode = MINUS;
4179 else if (! negs[i] && negs[j])
4180 ncode = MINUS;
4181
4182 tem = simplify_binary_operation (ncode, mode, lhs, rhs);
b7d9299b 4183 if (tem)
96b0e481
RK
4184 {
4185 ops[i] = tem, ops[j] = 0;
4186 negs[i] = negs[i] && negs[j];
4187 if (GET_CODE (tem) == NEG)
4188 ops[i] = XEXP (tem, 0), negs[i] = ! negs[i];
4189
4190 if (GET_CODE (ops[i]) == CONST_INT && negs[i])
4191 ops[i] = GEN_INT (- INTVAL (ops[i])), negs[i] = 0;
4192 changed = 1;
4193 }
4194 }
4195
4196 first = 0;
4197 }
4198
4199 /* Pack all the operands to the lower-numbered entries and give up if
91a60f37 4200 we didn't reduce the number of operands we had. Make sure we
fb5c8ce6
RK
4201 count a CONST as two operands. If we have the same number of
4202 operands, but have made more CONSTs than we had, this is also
4203 an improvement, so accept it. */
91a60f37 4204
fb5c8ce6 4205 for (i = 0, j = 0; j < n_ops; j++)
96b0e481 4206 if (ops[j] != 0)
91a60f37
RK
4207 {
4208 ops[i] = ops[j], negs[i++] = negs[j];
4209 if (GET_CODE (ops[j]) == CONST)
fb5c8ce6 4210 n_consts++;
91a60f37 4211 }
96b0e481 4212
fb5c8ce6
RK
4213 if (i + n_consts > input_ops
4214 || (i + n_consts == input_ops && n_consts <= input_consts))
96b0e481
RK
4215 return 0;
4216
4217 n_ops = i;
4218
4219 /* If we have a CONST_INT, put it last. */
4220 for (i = 0; i < n_ops - 1; i++)
4221 if (GET_CODE (ops[i]) == CONST_INT)
4222 {
4223 tem = ops[n_ops - 1], ops[n_ops - 1] = ops[i] , ops[i] = tem;
4224 j = negs[n_ops - 1], negs[n_ops - 1] = negs[i], negs[i] = j;
4225 }
4226
4227 /* Put a non-negated operand first. If there aren't any, make all
4228 operands positive and negate the whole thing later. */
4229 for (i = 0; i < n_ops && negs[i]; i++)
4230 ;
4231
4232 if (i == n_ops)
4233 {
4234 for (i = 0; i < n_ops; i++)
4235 negs[i] = 0;
4236 negate = 1;
4237 }
4238 else if (i != 0)
4239 {
4240 tem = ops[0], ops[0] = ops[i], ops[i] = tem;
4241 j = negs[0], negs[0] = negs[i], negs[i] = j;
4242 }
4243
4244 /* Now make the result by performing the requested operations. */
4245 result = ops[0];
4246 for (i = 1; i < n_ops; i++)
4247 result = cse_gen_binary (negs[i] ? MINUS : PLUS, mode, result, ops[i]);
4248
4249 return negate ? gen_rtx (NEG, mode, result) : result;
4250}
4251\f
4252/* Make a binary operation by properly ordering the operands and
4253 seeing if the expression folds. */
4254
4255static rtx
4256cse_gen_binary (code, mode, op0, op1)
4257 enum rtx_code code;
4258 enum machine_mode mode;
4259 rtx op0, op1;
4260{
4261 rtx tem;
4262
4263 /* Put complex operands first and constants second if commutative. */
4264 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c'
4265 && ((CONSTANT_P (op0) && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT)
4266 || (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op0)) == 'o'
4267 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op1)) != 'o')
4268 || (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
4269 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) == 'o'
4270 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (op1)) != 'o')))
4271 tem = op0, op0 = op1, op1 = tem;
4272
4273 /* If this simplifies, do it. */
4274 tem = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1);
4275
4276 if (tem)
4277 return tem;
4278
4279 /* Handle addition and subtraction of CONST_INT specially. Otherwise,
4280 just form the operation. */
4281
4282 if (code == PLUS && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4283 && GET_MODE (op0) != VOIDmode)
4284 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
4285 else if (code == MINUS && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4286 && GET_MODE (op0) != VOIDmode)
4287 return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
4288 else
4289 return gen_rtx (code, mode, op0, op1);
4290}
4291\f
7afe21cc 4292/* Like simplify_binary_operation except used for relational operators.
a432f20d
RK
4293 MODE is the mode of the operands, not that of the result. If MODE
4294 is VOIDmode, both operands must also be VOIDmode and we compare the
4295 operands in "infinite precision".
4296
4297 If no simplification is possible, this function returns zero. Otherwise,
4298 it returns either const_true_rtx or const0_rtx. */
7afe21cc
RK
4299
4300rtx
4301simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
4302 enum rtx_code code;
4303 enum machine_mode mode;
4304 rtx op0, op1;
4305{
a432f20d
RK
4306 int equal, op0lt, op0ltu, op1lt, op1ltu;
4307 rtx tem;
7afe21cc
RK
4308
4309 /* If op0 is a compare, extract the comparison arguments from it. */
4310 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
4311 op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
4312
28bad1cb
RK
4313 /* We can't simplify MODE_CC values since we don't know what the
4314 actual comparison is. */
4315 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_CC
4316#ifdef HAVE_cc0
4317 || op0 == cc0_rtx
4318#endif
4319 )
31dcf83f
RS
4320 return 0;
4321
a432f20d
RK
4322 /* For integer comparisons of A and B maybe we can simplify A - B and can
4323 then simplify a comparison of that with zero. If A and B are both either
4324 a register or a CONST_INT, this can't help; testing for these cases will
4325 prevent infinite recursion here and speed things up.
4326
4327 If CODE is an unsigned comparison, we can only do this if A - B is a
4328 constant integer, and then we have to compare that integer with zero as a
4329 signed comparison. Note that this will give the incorrect result from
4330 comparisons that overflow. Since these are undefined, this is probably
4331 OK. If it causes a problem, we can check for A or B being an address
4332 (fp + const or SYMBOL_REF) and only do it in that case. */
4333
4334 if (INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode) && op1 != const0_rtx
4335 && ! ((GET_CODE (op0) == REG || GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4336 && (GET_CODE (op1) == REG || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
4337 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0, op1))
4338 && (GET_CODE (tem) == CONST_INT
4339 || (code != GTU && code != GEU &&
4340 code != LTU && code != LEU)))
4341 return simplify_relational_operation (signed_condition (code),
4342 mode, tem, const0_rtx);
4343
4344 /* For non-IEEE floating-point, if the two operands are equal, we know the
4345 result. */
4346 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
4347 && (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
4348 || ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0)) || flag_fast_math))
4349 equal = 1, op0lt = 0, op0ltu = 0, op1lt = 0, op1ltu = 0;
4350
4351 /* If the operands are floating-point constants, see if we can fold
4352 the result. */
6076248a 4353#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
a432f20d
RK
4354 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
4355 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_FLOAT)
4356 {
4357 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d0, d1;
4358 jmp_buf handler;
4359
4360 if (setjmp (handler))
4361 return 0;
7afe21cc 4362
a432f20d
RK
4363 set_float_handler (handler);
4364 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d0, op0);
4365 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d1, op1);
4366 equal = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d0, d1);
4367 op0lt = op0ltu = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d0, d1);
4368 op1lt = op1ltu = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d1, d0);
4369 set_float_handler (NULL_PTR);
4370 }
4371#endif /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
7afe21cc 4372
a432f20d
RK
4373 /* Otherwise, see if the operands are both integers. */
4374 else if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT || mode == VOIDmode)
4375 && (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4376 && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
4377 {
4378 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
64812ded
RK
4379 HOST_WIDE_INT l0s, h0s, l1s, h1s;
4380 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT l0u, h0u, l1u, h1u;
7afe21cc 4381
a432f20d
RK
4382 /* Get the two words comprising each integer constant. */
4383 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE)
4384 {
4385 l0u = l0s = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0);
4386 h0u = h0s = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
7afe21cc 4387 }
a432f20d 4388 else
6076248a 4389 {
a432f20d
RK
4390 l0u = l0s = INTVAL (op0);
4391 h0u = 0, h0s = l0s < 0 ? -1 : 0;
4392 }
6076248a 4393
a432f20d
RK
4394 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
4395 {
4396 l1u = l1s = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1);
4397 h1u = h1s = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
4398 }
4399 else
4400 {
4401 l1u = l1s = INTVAL (op1);
4402 h1u = 0, h1s = l1s < 0 ? -1 : 0;
4403 }
4404
4405 /* If WIDTH is nonzero and smaller than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT,
4406 we have to sign or zero-extend the values. */
4407 if (width != 0 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
4408 h0u = h1u = 0, h0s = l0s < 0 ? -1 : 0, h1s = l1s < 0 ? -1 : 0;
6076248a 4409
a432f20d
RK
4410 if (width != 0 && width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
4411 {
4412 l0u &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
4413 l1u &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
6076248a 4414
a432f20d
RK
4415 if (l0s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
4416 l0s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
6076248a 4417
a432f20d
RK
4418 if (l1s & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1)))
4419 l1s |= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << width);
6076248a
RK
4420 }
4421
a432f20d
RK
4422 equal = (h0u == h1u && l0u == l1u);
4423 op0lt = (h0s < h1s || (h0s == h1s && l0s < l1s));
4424 op1lt = (h1s < h0s || (h1s == h0s && l1s < l0s));
4425 op0ltu = (h0u < h1u || (h0u == h1u && l0u < l1u));
4426 op1ltu = (h1u < h0u || (h1u == h0u && l1u < l0u));
4427 }
4428
4429 /* Otherwise, there are some code-specific tests we can make. */
4430 else
4431 {
7afe21cc
RK
4432 switch (code)
4433 {
4434 case EQ:
a432f20d
RK
4435 /* References to the frame plus a constant or labels cannot
4436 be zero, but a SYMBOL_REF can due to #pragma weak. */
4437 if (((NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
4438 || GET_CODE (op0) == LABEL_REF)
1a7c818b 4439#if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
a432f20d
RK
4440 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
4441 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx
7afe21cc 4442#endif
a432f20d
RK
4443 )
4444 return const0_rtx;
4445 break;
7afe21cc
RK
4446
4447 case NE:
a432f20d
RK
4448 if (((NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
4449 || GET_CODE (op0) == LABEL_REF)
1a7c818b 4450#if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
a432f20d 4451 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx
7afe21cc 4452#endif
a432f20d 4453 )
7afe21cc
RK
4454 return const_true_rtx;
4455 break;
4456
4457 case GEU:
a432f20d
RK
4458 /* Unsigned values are never negative. */
4459 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
7afe21cc
RK
4460 return const_true_rtx;
4461 break;
4462
4463 case LTU:
a432f20d 4464 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
7afe21cc
RK
4465 return const0_rtx;
4466 break;
4467
4468 case LEU:
4469 /* Unsigned values are never greater than the largest
4470 unsigned value. */
4471 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4472 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
a432f20d
RK
4473 && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode))
4474 return const_true_rtx;
7afe21cc
RK
4475 break;
4476
4477 case GTU:
4478 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4479 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
cbf6a543 4480 && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode))
7afe21cc
RK
4481 return const0_rtx;
4482 break;
4483 }
4484
4485 return 0;
4486 }
4487
a432f20d
RK
4488 /* If we reach here, EQUAL, OP0LT, OP0LTU, OP1LT, and OP1LTU are set
4489 as appropriate. */
7afe21cc
RK
4490 switch (code)
4491 {
7afe21cc 4492 case EQ:
a432f20d
RK
4493 return equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4494 case NE:
4495 return ! equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
7afe21cc 4496 case LT:
a432f20d 4497 return op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
7afe21cc 4498 case GT:
a432f20d 4499 return op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
7afe21cc 4500 case LTU:
a432f20d 4501 return op0ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
7afe21cc 4502 case GTU:
a432f20d
RK
4503 return op1ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4504 case LE:
4505 return equal || op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4506 case GE:
4507 return equal || op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4508 case LEU:
4509 return equal || op0ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4510 case GEU:
4511 return equal || op1ltu ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
7afe21cc
RK
4512 }
4513
a432f20d 4514 abort ();
7afe21cc
RK
4515}
4516\f
4517/* Simplify CODE, an operation with result mode MODE and three operands,
4518 OP0, OP1, and OP2. OP0_MODE was the mode of OP0 before it became
4519 a constant. Return 0 if no simplifications is possible. */
4520
4521rtx
4522simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, op0, op1, op2)
4523 enum rtx_code code;
4524 enum machine_mode mode, op0_mode;
4525 rtx op0, op1, op2;
4526{
4527 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
4528
4529 /* VOIDmode means "infinite" precision. */
4530 if (width == 0)
906c4e36 4531 width = HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT;
7afe21cc
RK
4532
4533 switch (code)
4534 {
4535 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
4536 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
4537 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT
4538 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4539 && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
4540 && INTVAL (op1) + INTVAL (op2) <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode)
906c4e36 4541 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7afe21cc
RK
4542 {
4543 /* Extracting a bit-field from a constant */
906c4e36 4544 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (op0);
7afe21cc
RK
4545
4546#if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
4547 val >>= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode) - INTVAL (op2) - INTVAL (op1));
4548#else
4549 val >>= INTVAL (op2);
4550#endif
906c4e36 4551 if (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != INTVAL (op1))
7afe21cc
RK
4552 {
4553 /* First zero-extend. */
906c4e36 4554 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1;
7afe21cc 4555 /* If desired, propagate sign bit. */
906c4e36
RK
4556 if (code == SIGN_EXTRACT
4557 && (val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (INTVAL (op1) - 1))))
4558 val |= ~ (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1);
7afe21cc
RK
4559 }
4560
4561 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
4562 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
4563 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
4564 unsigned value for this mode. */
906c4e36
RK
4565 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4566 && ((val & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1)))
4567 != ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << (width - 1))))
4568 val &= ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << width) - 1;
7afe21cc 4569
906c4e36 4570 return GEN_INT (val);
7afe21cc
RK
4571 }
4572 break;
4573
4574 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
4575 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4576 return op0 != const0_rtx ? op1 : op2;
4577 break;
4578
4579 default:
4580 abort ();
4581 }
4582
4583 return 0;
4584}
4585\f
4586/* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument
4587 for which a constant value can be determined, return
4588 the result of operating on that value, as a constant.
4589 Otherwise, return X, possibly with one or more operands
4590 modified by recursive calls to this function.
4591
e7bb59fa
RK
4592 If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT
4593 return those contents here. equiv_constant is called to
4594 perform that task.
7afe21cc
RK
4595
4596 INSN is the insn that we may be modifying. If it is 0, make a copy
4597 of X before modifying it. */
4598
4599static rtx
4600fold_rtx (x, insn)
4601 rtx x;
4602 rtx insn;
4603{
4604 register enum rtx_code code;
4605 register enum machine_mode mode;
4606 register char *fmt;
906c4e36 4607 register int i;
7afe21cc
RK
4608 rtx new = 0;
4609 int copied = 0;
4610 int must_swap = 0;
4611
4612 /* Folded equivalents of first two operands of X. */
4613 rtx folded_arg0;
4614 rtx folded_arg1;
4615
4616 /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
4617 0 when no such equivalent is known. */
4618 rtx const_arg0;
4619 rtx const_arg1;
4620 rtx const_arg2;
4621
4622 /* The mode of the first operand of X. We need this for sign and zero
4623 extends. */
4624 enum machine_mode mode_arg0;
4625
4626 if (x == 0)
4627 return x;
4628
4629 mode = GET_MODE (x);
4630 code = GET_CODE (x);
4631 switch (code)
4632 {
4633 case CONST:
4634 case CONST_INT:
4635 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4636 case SYMBOL_REF:
4637 case LABEL_REF:
4638 case REG:
4639 /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
4640 since they are used only for lists of args
4641 in a function call's REG_EQUAL note. */
4642 case EXPR_LIST:
4643 return x;
4644
4645#ifdef HAVE_cc0
4646 case CC0:
4647 return prev_insn_cc0;
4648#endif
4649
4650 case PC:
4651 /* If the next insn is a CODE_LABEL followed by a jump table,
4652 PC's value is a LABEL_REF pointing to that label. That
4653 lets us fold switch statements on the Vax. */
4654 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
4655 {
4656 rtx next = next_nonnote_insn (insn);
4657
4658 if (next && GET_CODE (next) == CODE_LABEL
4659 && NEXT_INSN (next) != 0
4660 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (next)) == JUMP_INSN
4661 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_VEC
4662 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC))
4663 return gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, next);
4664 }
4665 break;
4666
4667 case SUBREG:
c610adec
RK
4668 /* See if we previously assigned a constant value to this SUBREG. */
4669 if ((new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0
4670 || (new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_DOUBLE)) != 0)
7afe21cc
RK
4671 return new;
4672
4b980e20
RK
4673 /* If this is a paradoxical SUBREG, we have no idea what value the
4674 extra bits would have. However, if the operand is equivalent
4675 to a SUBREG whose operand is the same as our mode, and all the
4676 modes are within a word, we can just use the inner operand
31c85c78
RK
4677 because these SUBREGs just say how to treat the register.
4678
4679 Similarly if we find an integer constant. */
4b980e20 4680
e5f6a288 4681 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
4b980e20
RK
4682 {
4683 enum machine_mode imode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
4684 struct table_elt *elt;
4685
4686 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
4687 && GET_MODE_SIZE (imode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
4688 && (elt = lookup (SUBREG_REG (x), HASH (SUBREG_REG (x), imode),
4689 imode)) != 0)
31c85c78
RK
4690 for (elt = elt->first_same_value;
4691 elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4692 {
4693 if (CONSTANT_P (elt->exp)
4694 && GET_MODE (elt->exp) == VOIDmode)
4695 return elt->exp;
4696
4b980e20
RK
4697 if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == SUBREG
4698 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp)) == mode
906c4e36 4699 && exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
4b980e20
RK
4700 return copy_rtx (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp));
4701 }
4702
4703 return x;
4704 }
e5f6a288 4705
7afe21cc
RK
4706 /* Fold SUBREG_REG. If it changed, see if we can simplify the SUBREG.
4707 We might be able to if the SUBREG is extracting a single word in an
4708 integral mode or extracting the low part. */
4709
4710 folded_arg0 = fold_rtx (SUBREG_REG (x), insn);
4711 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
4712 if (const_arg0)
4713 folded_arg0 = const_arg0;
4714
4715 if (folded_arg0 != SUBREG_REG (x))
4716 {
4717 new = 0;
4718
4719 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4720 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4721 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode)
4722 new = operand_subword (folded_arg0, SUBREG_WORD (x), 0,
4723 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)));
4724 if (new == 0 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
4725 new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, folded_arg0);
4726 if (new)
4727 return new;
4728 }
e5f6a288
RK
4729
4730 /* If this is a narrowing SUBREG and our operand is a REG, see if
858a47b1 4731 we can find an equivalence for REG that is an arithmetic operation
e5f6a288
RK
4732 in a wider mode where both operands are paradoxical SUBREGs
4733 from objects of our result mode. In that case, we couldn't report
4734 an equivalent value for that operation, since we don't know what the
4735 extra bits will be. But we can find an equivalence for this SUBREG
4736 by folding that operation is the narrow mode. This allows us to
4737 fold arithmetic in narrow modes when the machine only supports
4b980e20
RK
4738 word-sized arithmetic.
4739
4740 Also look for a case where we have a SUBREG whose operand is the
4741 same as our result. If both modes are smaller than a word, we
4742 are simply interpreting a register in different modes and we
4743 can use the inner value. */
e5f6a288
RK
4744
4745 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
e8d76a39
RS
4746 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (folded_arg0))
4747 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
e5f6a288
RK
4748 {
4749 struct table_elt *elt;
4750
4751 /* We can use HASH here since we know that canon_hash won't be
4752 called. */
4753 elt = lookup (folded_arg0,
4754 HASH (folded_arg0, GET_MODE (folded_arg0)),
4755 GET_MODE (folded_arg0));
4756
4757 if (elt)
4758 elt = elt->first_same_value;
4759
4760 for (; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4761 {
e8d76a39
RS
4762 enum rtx_code eltcode = GET_CODE (elt->exp);
4763
e5f6a288
RK
4764 /* Just check for unary and binary operations. */
4765 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '1'
4766 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != SIGN_EXTEND
4767 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != ZERO_EXTEND
4768 && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4769 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0))) == mode)
4770 {
4771 rtx op0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4772
4773 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
906c4e36 4774 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, NULL_RTX);
e5f6a288
RK
4775
4776 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4777 if (op0)
4778 new = simplify_unary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4779 op0, mode);
4780 }
4781 else if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '2'
4782 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == 'c')
e8d76a39
RS
4783 && eltcode != DIV && eltcode != MOD
4784 && eltcode != UDIV && eltcode != UMOD
4785 && eltcode != ASHIFTRT && eltcode != LSHIFTRT
4786 && eltcode != ROTATE && eltcode != ROTATERT
e5f6a288
RK
4787 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4788 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4789 == mode))
4790 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4791 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)) == SUBREG
4792 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)))
4793 == mode))
4794 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 1))))
4795 {
4796 rtx op0 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4797 rtx op1 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 1));
4798
4799 if (op0 && GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
906c4e36 4800 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, NULL_RTX);
e5f6a288
RK
4801
4802 if (op0)
4803 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4804
4805 if (op1 && GET_CODE (op1) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op1))
906c4e36 4806 op1 = fold_rtx (op1, NULL_RTX);
e5f6a288
RK
4807
4808 if (op1)
4809 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
4810
76fb0b60
RS
4811 /* If we are looking for the low SImode part of
4812 (ashift:DI c (const_int 32)), it doesn't work
4813 to compute that in SImode, because a 32-bit shift
4814 in SImode is unpredictable. We know the value is 0. */
4815 if (op0 && op1
45620ed4 4816 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) == ASHIFT
76fb0b60
RS
4817 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4818 && INTVAL (op1) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
4819 {
4820 if (INTVAL (op1) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (elt->exp)))
4821
4822 /* If the count fits in the inner mode's width,
4823 but exceeds the outer mode's width,
4824 the value will get truncated to 0
4825 by the subreg. */
4826 new = const0_rtx;
4827 else
4828 /* If the count exceeds even the inner mode's width,
4829 don't fold this expression. */
4830 new = 0;
4831 }
4832 else if (op0 && op1)
e5f6a288
RK
4833 new = simplify_binary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4834 op0, op1);
4835 }
4836
4b980e20
RK
4837 else if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == SUBREG
4838 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp)) == mode
4839 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (folded_arg0))
4840 <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
906c4e36 4841 && exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
4b980e20
RK
4842 new = copy_rtx (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp));
4843
e5f6a288
RK
4844 if (new)
4845 return new;
4846 }
4847 }
4848
7afe21cc
RK
4849 return x;
4850
4851 case NOT:
4852 case NEG:
4853 /* If we have (NOT Y), see if Y is known to be (NOT Z).
4854 If so, (NOT Y) simplifies to Z. Similarly for NEG. */
4855 new = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), code);
4856 if (new)
4857 return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (XEXP (new, 0)), insn);
4858 break;
13c9910f 4859
7afe21cc
RK
4860 case MEM:
4861 /* If we are not actually processing an insn, don't try to find the
4862 best address. Not only don't we care, but we could modify the
4863 MEM in an invalid way since we have no insn to validate against. */
4864 if (insn != 0)
4865 find_best_addr (insn, &XEXP (x, 0));
4866
4867 {
4868 /* Even if we don't fold in the insn itself,
4869 we can safely do so here, in hopes of getting a constant. */
906c4e36 4870 rtx addr = fold_rtx (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc 4871 rtx base = 0;
906c4e36 4872 HOST_WIDE_INT offset = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
4873
4874 if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
4875 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
4876 && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
4877 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
4878 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
4879
4880 /* If address is constant, split it into a base and integer offset. */
4881 if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF || GET_CODE (addr) == LABEL_REF)
4882 base = addr;
4883 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == PLUS
4884 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)
4885 {
4886 base = XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 0);
4887 offset = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1));
4888 }
4889 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM
4890 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF)
4891 base = XEXP (addr, 1);
4892
4893 /* If this is a constant pool reference, we can fold it into its
4894 constant to allow better value tracking. */
4895 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == SYMBOL_REF
4896 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (base))
4897 {
4898 rtx constant = get_pool_constant (base);
4899 enum machine_mode const_mode = get_pool_mode (base);
4900 rtx new;
4901
4902 if (CONSTANT_P (constant) && GET_CODE (constant) != CONST_INT)
4903 constant_pool_entries_cost = COST (constant);
4904
4905 /* If we are loading the full constant, we have an equivalence. */
4906 if (offset == 0 && mode == const_mode)
4907 return constant;
4908
4909 /* If this actually isn't a constant (wierd!), we can't do
4910 anything. Otherwise, handle the two most common cases:
4911 extracting a word from a multi-word constant, and extracting
4912 the low-order bits. Other cases don't seem common enough to
4913 worry about. */
4914 if (! CONSTANT_P (constant))
4915 return x;
4916
4917 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4918 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4919 && offset % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0
4920 && (new = operand_subword (constant,
4921 offset / UNITS_PER_WORD,
4922 0, const_mode)) != 0)
4923 return new;
4924
4925 if (((BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
4926 && offset == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (constant)) - 1)
4927 || (! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && offset == 0))
4928 && (new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, constant)) != 0)
4929 return new;
4930 }
4931
4932 /* If this is a reference to a label at a known position in a jump
4933 table, we also know its value. */
4934 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == LABEL_REF)
4935 {
4936 rtx label = XEXP (base, 0);
4937 rtx table_insn = NEXT_INSN (label);
4938
4939 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4940 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_VEC)
4941 {
4942 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4943
4944 if (offset >= 0
4945 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4946 < XVECLEN (table, 0)))
4947 return XVECEXP (table, 0,
4948 offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table)));
4949 }
4950 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4951 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC)
4952 {
4953 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4954
4955 if (offset >= 0
4956 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4957 < XVECLEN (table, 1)))
4958 {
4959 offset /= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table));
4960 new = gen_rtx (MINUS, Pmode, XVECEXP (table, 1, offset),
4961 XEXP (table, 0));
4962
4963 if (GET_MODE (table) != Pmode)
4964 new = gen_rtx (TRUNCATE, GET_MODE (table), new);
4965
4966 return new;
4967 }
4968 }
4969 }
4970
4971 return x;
4972 }
4973 }
4974
4975 const_arg0 = 0;
4976 const_arg1 = 0;
4977 const_arg2 = 0;
4978 mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
4979
4980 /* Try folding our operands.
4981 Then see which ones have constant values known. */
4982
4983 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
4984 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4985 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
4986 {
4987 rtx arg = XEXP (x, i);
4988 rtx folded_arg = arg, const_arg = 0;
4989 enum machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (arg);
4990 rtx cheap_arg, expensive_arg;
4991 rtx replacements[2];
4992 int j;
4993
4994 /* Most arguments are cheap, so handle them specially. */
4995 switch (GET_CODE (arg))
4996 {
4997 case REG:
4998 /* This is the same as calling equiv_constant; it is duplicated
4999 here for speed. */
5000 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (arg))
5001 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]] != 0
5002 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != REG
5003 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != PLUS)
5004 const_arg
5005 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (arg),
5006 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]);
5007 break;
5008
5009 case CONST:
5010 case CONST_INT:
5011 case SYMBOL_REF:
5012 case LABEL_REF:
5013 case CONST_DOUBLE:
5014 const_arg = arg;
5015 break;
5016
5017#ifdef HAVE_cc0
5018 case CC0:
5019 folded_arg = prev_insn_cc0;
5020 mode_arg = prev_insn_cc0_mode;
5021 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
5022 break;
5023#endif
5024
5025 default:
5026 folded_arg = fold_rtx (arg, insn);
5027 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
5028 }
5029
5030 /* For the first three operands, see if the operand
5031 is constant or equivalent to a constant. */
5032 switch (i)
5033 {
5034 case 0:
5035 folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
5036 const_arg0 = const_arg;
5037 mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
5038 break;
5039 case 1:
5040 folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
5041 const_arg1 = const_arg;
5042 break;
5043 case 2:
5044 const_arg2 = const_arg;
5045 break;
5046 }
5047
5048 /* Pick the least expensive of the folded argument and an
5049 equivalent constant argument. */
5050 if (const_arg == 0 || const_arg == folded_arg
5051 || COST (const_arg) > COST (folded_arg))
5052 cheap_arg = folded_arg, expensive_arg = const_arg;
5053 else
5054 cheap_arg = const_arg, expensive_arg = folded_arg;
5055
5056 /* Try to replace the operand with the cheapest of the two
5057 possibilities. If it doesn't work and this is either of the first
5058 two operands of a commutative operation, try swapping them.
5059 If THAT fails, try the more expensive, provided it is cheaper
5060 than what is already there. */
5061
5062 if (cheap_arg == XEXP (x, i))
5063 continue;
5064
5065 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
5066 {
5067 x = copy_rtx (x);
5068 copied = 1;
5069 }
5070
5071 replacements[0] = cheap_arg, replacements[1] = expensive_arg;
5072 for (j = 0;
5073 j < 2 && replacements[j]
5074 && COST (replacements[j]) < COST (XEXP (x, i));
5075 j++)
5076 {
5077 if (validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), replacements[j], 0))
5078 break;
5079
5080 if (code == NE || code == EQ || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
5081 {
5082 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), XEXP (x, 1 - i), 1);
5083 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1 - i), replacements[j], 1);
5084
5085 if (apply_change_group ())
5086 {
5087 /* Swap them back to be invalid so that this loop can
5088 continue and flag them to be swapped back later. */
5089 rtx tem;
5090
5091 tem = XEXP (x, 0); XEXP (x, 0) = XEXP (x, 1);
5092 XEXP (x, 1) = tem;
5093 must_swap = 1;
5094 break;
5095 }
5096 }
5097 }
5098 }
5099
5100 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
5101 /* Don't try to fold inside of a vector of expressions.
5102 Doing nothing is harmless. */
5103 ;
5104
5105 /* If a commutative operation, place a constant integer as the second
5106 operand unless the first operand is also a constant integer. Otherwise,
5107 place any constant second unless the first operand is also a constant. */
5108
5109 if (code == EQ || code == NE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
5110 {
5111 if (must_swap || (const_arg0
5112 && (const_arg1 == 0
5113 || (GET_CODE (const_arg0) == CONST_INT
5114 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) != CONST_INT))))
5115 {
5116 register rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
5117
5118 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
5119 {
5120 x = copy_rtx (x);
5121 copied = 1;
5122 }
5123
5124 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1), 1);
5125 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1), tem, 1);
5126 if (apply_change_group ())
5127 {
5128 tem = const_arg0, const_arg0 = const_arg1, const_arg1 = tem;
5129 tem = folded_arg0, folded_arg0 = folded_arg1, folded_arg1 = tem;
5130 }
5131 }
5132 }
5133
5134 /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it. */
5135
5136 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
5137 {
5138 case '1':
e4890d45
RS
5139 /* We can't simplify extension ops unless we know the original mode. */
5140 if ((code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
5141 && mode_arg0 == VOIDmode)
5142 break;
7afe21cc
RK
5143 new = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
5144 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5145 mode_arg0);
5146 break;
5147
5148 case '<':
5149 /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
5150 to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code. If any are
5151 constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately. We needn't
5152 do anything if both operands are already known to be constant. */
5153
5154 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
5155 {
5156 struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
c610adec 5157 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
13c9910f 5158 enum machine_mode mode_arg1;
c610adec
RK
5159
5160#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
c7c955ee 5161 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
c610adec 5162 {
560c94a2
RK
5163 true = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE,
5164 mode);
c610adec
RK
5165 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
5166 }
5167#endif
7afe21cc 5168
13c9910f
RS
5169 code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1,
5170 &mode_arg0, &mode_arg1);
7afe21cc
RK
5171 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
5172 const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
5173
13c9910f
RS
5174 /* If the mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know
5175 what kinds of things are being compared, so we can't do
5176 anything with this comparison. */
7afe21cc
RK
5177
5178 if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
5179 break;
5180
5181 /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see if we
5182 can nevertheless deduce some things about the comparison. */
5183 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
5184 {
5185 /* Is FOLDED_ARG0 frame-pointer plus a constant? Or non-explicit
5186 constant? These aren't zero, but we don't know their sign. */
5187 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx
5188 && (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (folded_arg0)
5189#if 0 /* Sad to say, on sysvr4, #pragma weak can make a symbol address
5190 come out as 0. */
5191 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == SYMBOL_REF
5192#endif
5193 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == LABEL_REF
5194 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST))
5195 {
5196 if (code == EQ)
c610adec 5197 return false;
7afe21cc 5198 else if (code == NE)
c610adec 5199 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
5200 }
5201
5202 /* See if the two operands are the same. We don't do this
5203 for IEEE floating-point since we can't assume x == x
5204 since x might be a NaN. */
5205
5206 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
a83afb65 5207 || ! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode_arg0) || flag_fast_math)
7afe21cc
RK
5208 && (folded_arg0 == folded_arg1
5209 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
5210 && GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
5211 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)]
5212 == reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]))
5213 || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
5214 (safe_hash (folded_arg0, mode_arg0)
5215 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
5216 && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
5217 (safe_hash (folded_arg1, mode_arg0)
5218 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
5219 && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value)))
5220 return ((code == EQ || code == LE || code == GE
5221 || code == LEU || code == GEU)
c610adec 5222 ? true : false);
7afe21cc
RK
5223
5224 /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
5225 doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
5226 (we only check the reverse if not floating-point). */
5227 else if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG)
5228 {
5229 int qty = reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)];
5230
5231 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0))
5232 && (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty], code)
5233 || (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
5234 reverse_condition (code))
cbf6a543 5235 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode_arg0)))
7afe21cc
RK
5236 && (rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty], folded_arg1)
5237 || (const_arg1
5238 && rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty],
5239 const_arg1))
5240 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
5241 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]
5242 == qty_comparison_qty[qty]))))
5243 return (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
5244 code)
c610adec 5245 ? true : false);
7afe21cc
RK
5246 }
5247 }
5248 }
5249
5250 /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
5251 equivalent to an IOR with a constant. If so, we may be able to
5252 determine the result of this comparison. */
5253
5254 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx)
5255 {
5256 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
5257 rtx inner_const;
5258
5259 if (y != 0
5260 && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
5261 && GET_CODE (inner_const) == CONST_INT
5262 && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
5263 {
5264 int sign_bitnum = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode_arg0) - 1;
906c4e36
RK
5265 int has_sign = (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT >= sign_bitnum
5266 && (INTVAL (inner_const)
5267 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << sign_bitnum)));
c610adec
RK
5268 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
5269
5270#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
c7c955ee 5271 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
c610adec 5272 {
560c94a2
RK
5273 true = CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE,
5274 mode);
c610adec
RK
5275 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
5276 }
5277#endif
7afe21cc
RK
5278
5279 switch (code)
5280 {
5281 case EQ:
c610adec 5282 return false;
7afe21cc 5283 case NE:
c610adec 5284 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
5285 case LT: case LE:
5286 if (has_sign)
c610adec 5287 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
5288 break;
5289 case GT: case GE:
5290 if (has_sign)
c610adec 5291 return false;
7afe21cc
RK
5292 break;
5293 }
5294 }
5295 }
5296
5297 new = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode_arg0,
5298 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5299 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
c610adec
RK
5300#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5301 if (new != 0 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
5302 new = ((new == const0_rtx) ? CONST0_RTX (mode)
560c94a2 5303 : CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode));
c610adec 5304#endif
7afe21cc
RK
5305 break;
5306
5307 case '2':
5308 case 'c':
5309 switch (code)
5310 {
5311 case PLUS:
5312 /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
5313 with that LABEL_REF as its second operand. If so, the result is
5314 the first operand of that MINUS. This handles switches with an
5315 ADDR_DIFF_VEC table. */
5316 if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
5317 {
5318 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
5319
5320 if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
5321 && XEXP (XEXP (y, 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
5322 return XEXP (y, 0);
5323 }
c2cc0778
RK
5324
5325 /* If second operand is a register equivalent to a negative
5326 CONST_INT, see if we can find a register equivalent to the
5327 positive constant. Make a MINUS if so. Don't do this for
5328 a negative constant since we might then alternate between
5329 chosing positive and negative constants. Having the positive
5330 constant previously-used is the more common case. */
5331 if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT
5332 && INTVAL (const_arg1) < 0 && GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG)
5333 {
5334 rtx new_const = GEN_INT (- INTVAL (const_arg1));
5335 struct table_elt *p
5336 = lookup (new_const, safe_hash (new_const, mode) % NBUCKETS,
5337 mode);
5338
5339 if (p)
5340 for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5341 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG)
5342 return cse_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, folded_arg0,
5343 canon_reg (p->exp, NULL_RTX));
5344 }
13c9910f
RS
5345 goto from_plus;
5346
5347 case MINUS:
5348 /* If we have (MINUS Y C), see if Y is known to be (PLUS Z C2).
5349 If so, produce (PLUS Z C2-C). */
5350 if (const_arg1 != 0 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
5351 {
5352 rtx y = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), PLUS);
5353 if (y && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == CONST_INT)
f3becefd
RK
5354 return fold_rtx (plus_constant (copy_rtx (y),
5355 -INTVAL (const_arg1)),
a3b5c94a 5356 NULL_RTX);
13c9910f 5357 }
7afe21cc
RK
5358
5359 /* ... fall through ... */
5360
13c9910f 5361 from_plus:
7afe21cc
RK
5362 case SMIN: case SMAX: case UMIN: case UMAX:
5363 case IOR: case AND: case XOR:
5364 case MULT: case DIV: case UDIV:
5365 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
5366 /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
5367 is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
5368 operation with a combined operation. This may eliminate the
5369 intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
5370 Note that the similar optimization done by combine.c only works
5371 if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference. */
5372
5373 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
5374 && const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
5375 {
5376 int is_shift
5377 = (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
5378 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
5379 rtx inner_const;
5380 enum rtx_code associate_code;
5381 rtx new_const;
5382
5383 if (y == 0
5384 || 0 == (inner_const
5385 = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0)))
5386 || GET_CODE (inner_const) != CONST_INT
5387 /* If we have compiled a statement like
5388 "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
5389 "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
5390 of Y is the same as our first operand. Unless we detect
5391 this case, an infinite loop will result. */
5392 || XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
5393 break;
5394
5395 /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
5396 same constant and it is a power of two. These might be doable
5397 with a pre- or post-increment. Similarly for two subtracts of
5398 identical powers of two with post decrement. */
5399
5400 if (code == PLUS && INTVAL (const_arg1) == INTVAL (inner_const)
5401 && (0
5402#if defined(HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_INCREMENT)
5403 || exact_log2 (INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
5404#endif
5405#if defined(HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_DECREMENT)
5406 || exact_log2 (- INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
5407#endif
5408 ))
5409 break;
5410
5411 /* Compute the code used to compose the constants. For example,
5412 A/C1/C2 is A/(C1 * C2), so if CODE == DIV, we want MULT. */
5413
5414 associate_code
5415 = (code == MULT || code == DIV || code == UDIV ? MULT
5416 : is_shift || code == PLUS || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
5417
5418 new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
5419 const_arg1, inner_const);
5420
5421 if (new_const == 0)
5422 break;
5423
5424 /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
4908e508
RS
5425 produce a shift of the size of the object or larger.
5426 This could occur when we follow a sign-extend by a right
5427 shift on a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair
5428 of shifts. */
7afe21cc
RK
5429
5430 if (is_shift && GET_CODE (new_const) == CONST_INT
4908e508
RS
5431 && INTVAL (new_const) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
5432 {
5433 /* As an exception, we can turn an ASHIFTRT of this
5434 form into a shift of the number of bits - 1. */
5435 if (code == ASHIFTRT)
5436 new_const = GEN_INT (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1);
5437 else
5438 break;
5439 }
7afe21cc
RK
5440
5441 y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
5442
5443 /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
5444 can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
5445 loop if we tried to fold it. So don't in that case. */
5446
5447 if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
5448 y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
5449
96b0e481 5450 return cse_gen_binary (code, mode, y, new_const);
7afe21cc
RK
5451 }
5452 }
5453
5454 new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
5455 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5456 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
5457 break;
5458
5459 case 'o':
5460 /* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X. */
5461 if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
5462 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
5463 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
5464 return const_arg1;
5465 break;
5466
5467 case '3':
5468 case 'b':
5469 new = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
5470 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5471 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
5472 const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
5473 break;
5474 }
5475
5476 return new ? new : x;
5477}
5478\f
5479/* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
5480 Return 0 if we don't know one. */
5481
5482static rtx
5483equiv_constant (x)
5484 rtx x;
5485{
5486 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG
5487 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
5488 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
5489 x = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]);
5490
5491 if (x != 0 && CONSTANT_P (x))
5492 return x;
5493
fc3ffe83
RK
5494 /* If X is a MEM, try to fold it outside the context of any insn to see if
5495 it might be equivalent to a constant. That handles the case where it
5496 is a constant-pool reference. Then try to look it up in the hash table
5497 in case it is something whose value we have seen before. */
5498
5499 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
5500 {
5501 struct table_elt *elt;
5502
906c4e36 5503 x = fold_rtx (x, NULL_RTX);
fc3ffe83
RK
5504 if (CONSTANT_P (x))
5505 return x;
5506
5507 elt = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, GET_MODE (x)) % NBUCKETS, GET_MODE (x));
5508 if (elt == 0)
5509 return 0;
5510
5511 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
5512 if (elt->is_const && CONSTANT_P (elt->exp))
5513 return elt->exp;
5514 }
5515
7afe21cc
RK
5516 return 0;
5517}
5518\f
5519/* Assuming that X is an rtx (e.g., MEM, REG or SUBREG) for a fixed-point
5520 number, return an rtx (MEM, SUBREG, or CONST_INT) that refers to the
5521 least-significant part of X.
5522 MODE specifies how big a part of X to return.
5523
5524 If the requested operation cannot be done, 0 is returned.
5525
5526 This is similar to gen_lowpart in emit-rtl.c. */
5527
5528rtx
5529gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, x)
5530 enum machine_mode mode;
5531 register rtx x;
5532{
5533 rtx result = gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
5534
5535 if (result)
5536 return result;
5537 else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
5538 {
5539 /* This is the only other case we handle. */
5540 register int offset = 0;
5541 rtx new;
5542
5543#if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
5544 offset = (MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)), UNITS_PER_WORD)
5545 - MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD));
5546#endif
5547#if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
5548 /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data
5549 is unchanged. */
5550 offset -= (MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
5551 - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))));
5552#endif
5553 new = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, plus_constant (XEXP (x, 0), offset));
5554 if (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (new, 0)))
5555 return 0;
5556 MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (x);
5557 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x);
5558 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x);
5559 return new;
5560 }
5561 else
5562 return 0;
5563}
5564\f
5565/* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the "taken"
5566 branch. It will be zero if not.
5567
5568 In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence. For example,
5569 if we are following the taken case of
5570 if (i == 2)
5571 we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
5572
5573 In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed. If the same
5574 comparison is seen later, we will know its value. */
5575
5576static void
5577record_jump_equiv (insn, taken)
5578 rtx insn;
5579 int taken;
5580{
5581 int cond_known_true;
5582 rtx op0, op1;
13c9910f 5583 enum machine_mode mode, mode0, mode1;
7afe21cc
RK
5584 int reversed_nonequality = 0;
5585 enum rtx_code code;
5586
5587 /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn. */
5588 if (! condjump_p (insn) || simplejump_p (insn))
5589 return;
5590
5591 /* See if this jump condition is known true or false. */
5592 if (taken)
5593 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 2) == pc_rtx);
5594 else
5595 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 1) == pc_rtx);
5596
5597 /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
5598 If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
5599 know that it isn't valid for floating-point. */
5600 code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0));
5601 op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 0), insn);
5602 op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 1), insn);
5603
13c9910f 5604 code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1, &mode0, &mode1);
7afe21cc
RK
5605 if (! cond_known_true)
5606 {
5607 reversed_nonequality = (code != EQ && code != NE);
5608 code = reverse_condition (code);
5609 }
5610
5611 /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant. */
13c9910f
RS
5612 mode = mode0;
5613 if (mode1 != VOIDmode)
5614 mode = mode1;
7afe21cc
RK
5615
5616 record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
5617}
5618
5619/* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
5620 REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
5621 Make any useful entries we can with that information. Called from
5622 above function and called recursively. */
5623
5624static void
5625record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality)
5626 enum rtx_code code;
5627 enum machine_mode mode;
5628 rtx op0, op1;
5629 int reversed_nonequality;
5630{
2197a88a 5631 unsigned op0_hash, op1_hash;
7afe21cc
RK
5632 int op0_in_memory, op0_in_struct, op1_in_memory, op1_in_struct;
5633 struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
5634
5635 /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
5636 we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
5637 true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
5638 is not worth testing for with no SUBREG. */
5639
2e794ee8 5640 /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE. */
7afe21cc 5641 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
2e794ee8
RS
5642 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0))
5643 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))))
7afe21cc
RK
5644 {
5645 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5646 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5647
5648 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5649 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5650 reversed_nonequality);
5651 }
5652
5653 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
2e794ee8
RS
5654 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op1))
5655 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1)))))
7afe21cc
RK
5656 {
5657 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5658 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5659
5660 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5661 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5662 reversed_nonequality);
5663 }
5664
5665 /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG
5666 making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE. */
5667
2e794ee8
RS
5668 /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE;
5669 if we test MODE instead, we can get an infinite recursion
5670 alternating between two modes each wider than MODE. */
5671
7afe21cc
RK
5672 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5673 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
2e794ee8
RS
5674 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0))
5675 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))))
7afe21cc
RK
5676 {
5677 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5678 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5679
5680 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5681 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5682 reversed_nonequality);
5683 }
5684
5685 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5686 && subreg_lowpart_p (op1)
2e794ee8
RS
5687 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op1))
5688 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1)))))
7afe21cc
RK
5689 {
5690 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5691 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5692
5693 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5694 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5695 reversed_nonequality);
5696 }
5697
5698 /* Hash both operands. */
5699
5700 do_not_record = 0;
5701 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5702 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
2197a88a 5703 op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5704 op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5705 op0_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5706
5707 if (do_not_record)
5708 return;
5709
5710 do_not_record = 0;
5711 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5712 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
2197a88a 5713 op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5714 op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5715 op1_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5716
5717 if (do_not_record)
5718 return;
5719
5720 /* Look up both operands. */
2197a88a
RK
5721 op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash, mode);
5722 op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5723
5724 /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
b2796a4b
RK
5725 comparison. Similarly if this is floating-point. In the latter
5726 case, OP1 might be zero and both -0.0 and 0.0 are equal to it.
5727 If we record the equality, we might inadvertently delete code
5728 whose intent was to change -0 to +0. */
5729
cbf6a543 5730 if (code != EQ || FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0)))
7afe21cc
RK
5731 {
5732 /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
5733 register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
5734 do anything. */
5735
5736 if (GET_CODE (op1) != REG)
5737 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
5738
cbf6a543 5739 if ((reversed_nonequality && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
7afe21cc
RK
5740 || GET_CODE (op0) != REG || op1 == 0)
5741 return;
5742
5743 /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already. This gives it a
5744 new quantity number. */
5745 if (op0_elt == 0)
5746 {
906c4e36 5747 if (insert_regs (op0, NULL_PTR, 0))
7afe21cc
RK
5748 {
5749 rehash_using_reg (op0);
2197a88a 5750 op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
2bb81c86
RK
5751
5752 /* If OP0 is contained in OP1, this changes its hash code
5753 as well. Faster to rehash than to check, except
5754 for the simple case of a constant. */
5755 if (! CONSTANT_P (op1))
2197a88a 5756 op1_hash = HASH (op1,mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5757 }
5758
2197a88a 5759 op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL_PTR, op0_hash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5760 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5761 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5762 }
5763
5764 qty_comparison_code[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = code;
5765 if (GET_CODE (op1) == REG)
5766 {
5d5ea909 5767 /* Look it up again--in case op0 and op1 are the same. */
2197a88a 5768 op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
5d5ea909 5769
7afe21cc
RK
5770 /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number. */
5771 if (op1_elt == 0)
5772 {
906c4e36 5773 if (insert_regs (op1, NULL_PTR, 0))
7afe21cc
RK
5774 {
5775 rehash_using_reg (op1);
2197a88a 5776 op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5777 }
5778
2197a88a 5779 op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL_PTR, op1_hash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5780 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5781 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5782 }
5783
5784 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = reg_qty[REGNO (op1)];
5785 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = 0;
5786 }
5787 else
5788 {
5789 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = -1;
5790 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = op1;
5791 }
5792
5793 return;
5794 }
5795
eb5ad42a
RS
5796 /* If either side is still missing an equivalence, make it now,
5797 then merge the equivalences. */
7afe21cc 5798
7afe21cc
RK
5799 if (op0_elt == 0)
5800 {
eb5ad42a 5801 if (insert_regs (op0, NULL_PTR, 0))
7afe21cc
RK
5802 {
5803 rehash_using_reg (op0);
2197a88a 5804 op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5805 }
5806
2197a88a 5807 op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL_PTR, op0_hash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5808 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5809 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
7afe21cc
RK
5810 }
5811
5812 if (op1_elt == 0)
5813 {
eb5ad42a 5814 if (insert_regs (op1, NULL_PTR, 0))
7afe21cc
RK
5815 {
5816 rehash_using_reg (op1);
2197a88a 5817 op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5818 }
5819
2197a88a 5820 op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL_PTR, op1_hash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
5821 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5822 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
7afe21cc 5823 }
eb5ad42a
RS
5824
5825 merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
5826 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
7afe21cc
RK
5827}
5828\f
5829/* CSE processing for one instruction.
5830 First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
5831 in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
5832 Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
5833 of available values.
5834
5835 If IN_LIBCALL_BLOCK is nonzero, don't record any equivalence made in
5836 the insn. */
5837
5838/* Data on one SET contained in the instruction. */
5839
5840struct set
5841{
5842 /* The SET rtx itself. */
5843 rtx rtl;
5844 /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing). */
5845 rtx src;
5846 /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET. */
5847 struct table_elt *src_elt;
2197a88a
RK
5848 /* Hash value for the SET_SRC. */
5849 unsigned src_hash;
5850 /* Hash value for the SET_DEST. */
5851 unsigned dest_hash;
7afe21cc
RK
5852 /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped. */
5853 rtx inner_dest;
5854 /* Place where the pointer to the INNER_DEST was found. */
5855 rtx *inner_dest_loc;
5856 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory. */
5857 char src_in_memory;
5858 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in a structure. */
5859 char src_in_struct;
5860 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
5861 whose value cannot be predicted and understood. */
5862 char src_volatile;
5863 /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT. */
5864 enum machine_mode mode;
5865 /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5866 rtx src_const;
2197a88a
RK
5867 /* Hash value of constant equivalent for SET_SRC. */
5868 unsigned src_const_hash;
7afe21cc
RK
5869 /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5870 struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
5871};
5872
5873static void
5874cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block)
5875 rtx insn;
5876 int in_libcall_block;
5877{
5878 register rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
7afe21cc 5879 register int i;
92f9aa51 5880 rtx tem;
7afe21cc
RK
5881 register int n_sets = 0;
5882
5883 /* Records what this insn does to set CC0. */
5884 rtx this_insn_cc0 = 0;
5885 enum machine_mode this_insn_cc0_mode;
5886 struct write_data writes_memory;
5887 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
5888
5889 rtx src_eqv = 0;
5890 struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
5891 int src_eqv_volatile;
5892 int src_eqv_in_memory;
5893 int src_eqv_in_struct;
2197a88a 5894 unsigned src_eqv_hash;
7afe21cc
RK
5895
5896 struct set *sets;
5897
5898 this_insn = insn;
5899 writes_memory = init;
5900
5901 /* Find all the SETs and CLOBBERs in this instruction.
5902 Record all the SETs in the array `set' and count them.
5903 Also determine whether there is a CLOBBER that invalidates
5904 all memory references, or all references at varying addresses. */
5905
f1e7c95f
RK
5906 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
5907 {
5908 for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
5909 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == CLOBBER)
5910 invalidate (SET_DEST (XEXP (tem, 0)));
5911 }
5912
7afe21cc
RK
5913 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
5914 {
5915 sets = (struct set *) alloca (sizeof (struct set));
5916 sets[0].rtl = x;
5917
5918 /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
5919 They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
5920 The reason is not efficiency but rather
5921 so that we can test at the end for instructions
5922 that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
5923 and not be misled by unchanged instructions
5924 that were unconditional jumps to begin with. */
5925 if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
5926 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
5927 ;
5928
5929 /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
5930 The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
5931 someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing (and on 80386 is unsafe)!
5932 Ensure we invalidate the destination register. On the 80386 no
7722328e
RK
5933 other code would invalidate it since it is a fixed_reg.
5934 We need not check the return of apply_change_group; see canon_reg. */
7afe21cc
RK
5935
5936 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
5937 {
5938 canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
77fa0940 5939 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
5940 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
5941 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
5942 }
5943 else
5944 n_sets = 1;
5945 }
5946 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
5947 {
5948 register int lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
5949
5950 sets = (struct set *) alloca (lim * sizeof (struct set));
5951
5952 /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
5953 and ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
5954 elsewhere in this insn.
5955 When a reg that is clobbered is also used for input,
5956 we should presume that that is for a reason,
5957 and we should not substitute some other register
5958 which is not supposed to be clobbered.
5959 Therefore, this loop cannot be merged into the one below
830a38ee 5960 because a CALL may precede a CLOBBER and refer to the
7afe21cc
RK
5961 value clobbered. We must not let a canonicalization do
5962 anything in that case. */
5963 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5964 {
5965 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
2708da92
RS
5966 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
5967 {
5968 rtx clobbered = XEXP (y, 0);
5969
5970 if (GET_CODE (clobbered) == REG
5971 || GET_CODE (clobbered) == SUBREG)
5972 invalidate (clobbered);
5973 else if (GET_CODE (clobbered) == STRICT_LOW_PART
5974 || GET_CODE (clobbered) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
5975 invalidate (XEXP (clobbered, 0));
5976 }
7afe21cc
RK
5977 }
5978
5979 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5980 {
5981 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
5982 if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
5983 {
7722328e
RK
5984 /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns and
5985 ignore the result of apply_change_group. */
7afe21cc
RK
5986 if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
5987 {
5988 canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
77fa0940 5989 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
5990 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
5991 invalidate (SET_DEST (y));
5992 }
5993 else if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
5994 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
5995 ;
5996 else
5997 sets[n_sets++].rtl = y;
5998 }
5999 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
6000 {
6001 /* If we clobber memory, take note of that,
6002 and canon the address.
6003 This does nothing when a register is clobbered
6004 because we have already invalidated the reg. */
6005 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MEM)
6006 {
906c4e36 6007 canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6008 note_mem_written (XEXP (y, 0), &writes_memory);
6009 }
6010 }
6011 else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
6012 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
6013 && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
906c4e36 6014 canon_reg (y, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6015 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
6016 {
7722328e
RK
6017 /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see
6018 canon_reg. */
7afe21cc 6019 canon_reg (y, insn);
77fa0940 6020 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
6021 fold_rtx (y, insn);
6022 }
6023 }
6024 }
6025 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
6026 {
6027 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM)
6028 {
906c4e36 6029 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6030 note_mem_written (XEXP (x, 0), &writes_memory);
6031 }
6032 }
6033
6034 /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location. */
6035 else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
6036 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
6037 && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
906c4e36 6038 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6039 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
6040 {
7722328e 6041 /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg. */
7afe21cc 6042 canon_reg (x, insn);
77fa0940 6043 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
6044 fold_rtx (x, insn);
6045 }
6046
7b3ab05e
JW
6047 /* Store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV, if different, or if the DEST
6048 is a STRICT_LOW_PART. The latter condition is necessary because SRC_EQV
6049 is handled specially for this case, and if it isn't set, then there will
6050 be no equivalence for the destinatation. */
92f9aa51
RK
6051 if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0
6052 && (tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX)) != 0
7b3ab05e
JW
6053 && (! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
6054 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART))
92f9aa51 6055 src_eqv = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6056
6057 /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
6058 We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
6059 present in the insn pattern. In that case, we want to ensure that
6060 we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern. So we will replace
6061 both operands at the same time. Otherwise, we would fail to find an
6062 equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
7afe21cc
RK
6063
6064 We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
77fa0940 6065 but we don't do this any more. */
7afe21cc
RK
6066
6067 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6068 {
6069 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6070 rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
6071 rtx new = canon_reg (src, insn);
6072
77fa0940
RK
6073 if ((GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (src) == REG
6074 && ((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6075 != (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
6076 || insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0)
6077 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new, 1);
7afe21cc
RK
6078 else
6079 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = new;
6080
6081 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6082 {
6083 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
77fa0940 6084 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 1);
7afe21cc 6085 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
77fa0940 6086 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 1);
7afe21cc
RK
6087 }
6088
6089 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6090 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6091 || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6092 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6093
6094 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6095 canon_reg (dest, insn);
6096 }
6097
77fa0940
RK
6098 /* Now that we have done all the replacements, we can apply the change
6099 group and see if they all work. Note that this will cause some
6100 canonicalizations that would have worked individually not to be applied
6101 because some other canonicalization didn't work, but this should not
7722328e
RK
6102 occur often.
6103
6104 The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg. */
77fa0940
RK
6105
6106 apply_change_group ();
6107
7afe21cc
RK
6108 /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
6109 Detect assignments from or to volatile things
6110 and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
6111 in the rest of this function.
6112
6113 Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains. */
6114
6115 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6116 {
6117 register rtx src, dest;
6118 register rtx src_folded;
6119 register struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
6120 enum machine_mode mode;
6121 rtx src_eqv_here;
6122 rtx src_const = 0;
6123 rtx src_related = 0;
6124 struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
6125 int src_cost = 10000, src_eqv_cost = 10000, src_folded_cost = 10000;
6126 int src_related_cost = 10000, src_elt_cost = 10000;
6127 /* Set non-zero if we need to call force_const_mem on with the
6128 contents of src_folded before using it. */
6129 int src_folded_force_flag = 0;
6130
6131 dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6132 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
6133
6134 /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
6135 hash it with the destination's machine mode.
6136 This way we can keep different modes separate. */
6137
6138 mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
6139 sets[i].mode = mode;
6140
6141 if (src_eqv)
6142 {
6143 enum machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
6144 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6145 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
6146 do_not_record = 0;
6147 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
6148 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
6149 src_eqv = fold_rtx (src_eqv, insn);
2197a88a 6150 src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
7afe21cc
RK
6151
6152 /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression. */
6153
6154 if (!do_not_record)
2197a88a 6155 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
7afe21cc
RK
6156
6157 src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
6158 src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
6159 src_eqv_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
6160 }
6161
6162 /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
6163 value of the INNER register, not the destination. So it is not
6164 a legal substitution for the source. But save it for later. */
6165 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6166 src_eqv_here = 0;
6167 else
6168 src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
6169
6170 /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC. Then get the fully-
6171 simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid. */
6172 src_folded = fold_rtx (src, insn);
6173
6174 /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
6175 so we will be able to record it later. */
6176 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6177 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6178 {
6179 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
6180
6181 if (GET_CODE (src) == CONST_INT
6182 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
906c4e36
RK
6183 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
6184 && (INTVAL (src) & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
6185 src_folded
6186 = GEN_INT (INTVAL (src) & (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
6187 << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
7afe21cc
RK
6188 }
6189
6190 /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
6191 should not be recorded at all. In that case,
6192 prevent any further processing of this assignment. */
6193 do_not_record = 0;
6194 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
6195 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
6196
6197 sets[i].src = src;
2197a88a 6198 sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
6199 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
6200 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
6201 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
6202
0dadecf6
RK
6203#if 0
6204 /* It is no longer clear why we used to do this, but it doesn't
6205 appear to still be needed. So let's try without it since this
6206 code hurts cse'ing widened ops. */
7afe21cc
RK
6207 /* If source is a perverse subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
6208 treat it as volatile. It may do the work of an SI in one context
6209 where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
6210 in general. */
6211 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
6212 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
6213 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
6214 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
0dadecf6 6215#endif
7afe21cc
RK
6216
6217 /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC. Try to replace
6218 SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
6219
6220 We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
6221 version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
6222 to a constant.
6223
6224 Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
6225 of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
6226 the same class; we check for this).
6227
6228 If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
6229
6230 We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
6231 REG_NOTE. */
6232
6233 if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
2197a88a 6234 elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
6235
6236 sets[i].src_elt = elt;
6237
6238 if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
6239 {
6240 if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
6241 {
6242 /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
6243 classes are now equivalent. So merge them. */
6244 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
2197a88a
RK
6245 src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
6246 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, elt->mode);
7afe21cc
RK
6247 }
6248
6249 src_eqv_here = 0;
6250 }
6251
6252 else if (src_eqv_elt)
6253 elt = src_eqv_elt;
6254
6255 /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
6256 Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'. Look in
6257 any known equivalences first. (If the constant is not in the
2197a88a 6258 table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash'). */
7afe21cc
RK
6259 if (elt)
6260 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
6261 if (p->is_const)
6262 {
6263 src_const = p->exp;
6264 src_const_elt = elt;
6265 break;
6266 }
6267
6268 if (src_const == 0
6269 && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
6270 /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as
6271 "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
6272 to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used. */
6273 || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
6274 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
6275 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
6276 src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
6277 else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
6278 src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6279
6280 /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
6281 hash code and look it up. */
6282 if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
6283 {
2197a88a
RK
6284 sets[i].src_const_hash = HASH (src_const, mode);
6285 src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
6286 }
6287
6288 sets[i].src_const = src_const;
6289 sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
6290
6291 /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
6292 equivalent. Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
6293 isn't, set ELT to it. */
6294 if (src_const_elt && elt
6295 && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
6296 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
6297 else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
6298 elt = src_const_elt;
6299
6300 /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
6301 equivalent of SRC. */
6302 if (src_const
6303 && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
6304 || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
6305 {
6306 src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
6307 if (src_related)
6308 {
6309 struct table_elt *src_related_elt
6310 = lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
6311 if (src_related_elt && elt)
6312 {
6313 if (elt->first_same_value
6314 != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
6315 /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST
6316 involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
6317 twice. Merge the involved classes. */
6318 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
6319
6320 src_related = 0;
6321 src_related_elt = 0;
6322 }
6323 else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
6324 elt = src_related_elt;
6325 }
6326 }
6327
e4600702
RK
6328 /* See if we have a CONST_INT that is already in a register in a
6329 wider mode. */
6330
6331 if (src_const && src_related == 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
6332 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6333 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
6334 {
6335 enum machine_mode wider_mode;
6336
6337 for (wider_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
6338 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wider_mode) <= BITS_PER_WORD
6339 && src_related == 0;
6340 wider_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode))
6341 {
6342 struct table_elt *const_elt
6343 = lookup (src_const, HASH (src_const, wider_mode), wider_mode);
6344
6345 if (const_elt == 0)
6346 continue;
6347
6348 for (const_elt = const_elt->first_same_value;
6349 const_elt; const_elt = const_elt->next_same_value)
6350 if (GET_CODE (const_elt->exp) == REG)
6351 {
6352 src_related = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode,
6353 const_elt->exp);
6354 break;
6355 }
6356 }
6357 }
6358
d45cf215
RS
6359 /* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
6360 a mode narrower than a word. If so, it might have been generated
6361 as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND. If we already
6362 have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
6363 value. */
6364
6365 if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
6366 && GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 1)) == CONST_INT
6367 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
6368 {
6369 enum machine_mode tmode;
906c4e36 6370 rtx new_and = gen_rtx (AND, VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, XEXP (src, 1));
d45cf215
RS
6371
6372 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
6373 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
6374 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
6375 {
6376 rtx inner = gen_lowpart_if_possible (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
6377 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
6378
6379 if (inner)
6380 {
6381 PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
6382 XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
6383 larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
6384 if (larger_elt == 0)
6385 continue;
6386
6387 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
6388 larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
6389 if (GET_CODE (larger_elt->exp) == REG)
6390 {
6391 src_related
6392 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, larger_elt->exp);
6393 break;
6394 }
6395
6396 if (src_related)
6397 break;
6398 }
6399 }
6400 }
7bac1be0
RK
6401
6402#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
6403 /* See if a MEM has already been loaded with a widening operation;
6404 if it has, we can use a subreg of that. Many CISC machines
6405 also have such operations, but this is only likely to be
6406 beneficial these machines. */
6407
6408 if (flag_expensive_optimizations && src_related == 0
6409 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
6410 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6411 && GET_CODE (src) == MEM && ! do_not_record
6412 && LOAD_EXTEND_OP (mode) != NIL)
6413 {
6414 enum machine_mode tmode;
6415
6416 /* Set what we are trying to extend and the operation it might
6417 have been extended with. */
6418 PUT_CODE (memory_extend_rtx, LOAD_EXTEND_OP (mode));
6419 XEXP (memory_extend_rtx, 0) = src;
6420
6421 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
6422 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
6423 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
6424 {
6425 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
6426
6427 PUT_MODE (memory_extend_rtx, tmode);
6428 larger_elt = lookup (memory_extend_rtx,
6429 HASH (memory_extend_rtx, tmode), tmode);
6430 if (larger_elt == 0)
6431 continue;
6432
6433 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
6434 larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
6435 if (GET_CODE (larger_elt->exp) == REG)
6436 {
6437 src_related = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode,
6438 larger_elt->exp);
6439 break;
6440 }
6441
6442 if (src_related)
6443 break;
6444 }
6445 }
6446#endif /* LOAD_EXTEND_OP */
6447
7afe21cc
RK
6448 if (src == src_folded)
6449 src_folded = 0;
6450
6451 /* At this point, ELT, if non-zero, points to a class of expressions
6452 equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
6453 and SRC_RELATED, if non-zero, each contain additional equivalent
6454 expressions. Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
6455 already in the equivalence class.
6456
6457 Check for an equivalent identical to the destination. If found,
6458 this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
6459 elimination of the insn. Indicate this by placing it in
6460 `src_related'. */
6461
6462 if (elt) elt = elt->first_same_value;
6463 for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
6464 {
6465 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
6466
6467 /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it. Then we do not
6468 have to check for validity below. In most cases, we can use
6469 `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done. */
6470 if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
6471 continue;
6472
6473 if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
6474 src = 0;
6475 else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
6476 && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
6477 src_folded = 0;
6478 else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
6479 && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
6480 src_eqv_here = 0;
6481 else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
6482 && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
6483 src_related = 0;
6484
6485 /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
6486 to prefer it. Copy it to src_related. The code below will
6487 then give it a negative cost. */
6488 if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
6489 src_related = dest;
6490
6491 }
6492
6493 /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
6494 possibilities. Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
6495 that are when they are equal cost. Note that we can never
6496 worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
05c33dd8 6497 If we find an equivalent identical to the destination, use it as best,
7afe21cc
RK
6498 since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case. */
6499 if (src)
6500 {
6501 if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
6502 src_cost = -1;
6503 else
6504 src_cost = COST (src);
6505 }
6506
6507 if (src_eqv_here)
6508 {
6509 if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
6510 src_eqv_cost = -1;
6511 else
6512 src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here);
6513 }
6514
6515 if (src_folded)
6516 {
6517 if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
6518 src_folded_cost = -1;
6519 else
6520 src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded);
6521 }
6522
6523 if (src_related)
6524 {
6525 if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
6526 src_related_cost = -1;
6527 else
6528 src_related_cost = COST (src_related);
6529 }
6530
6531 /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
6532 cheaper even though it looks more expensive. */
6533 if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
6534 src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = -1;
6535
6536 /* Terminate loop when replacement made. This must terminate since
6537 the current contents will be tested and will always be valid. */
6538 while (1)
6539 {
6540 rtx trial;
6541
6542 /* Skip invalid entries. */
6543 while (elt && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
6544 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
6545 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6546
6547 if (elt) src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
6548
6549 /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time. For items
6550 of equal cost, use this order:
6551 src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry. */
6552 if (src_folded_cost <= src_cost
6553 && src_folded_cost <= src_eqv_cost
6554 && src_folded_cost <= src_related_cost
6555 && src_folded_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6556 {
6557 trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = 10000;
6558 if (src_folded_force_flag)
6559 trial = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
6560 }
6561 else if (src_cost <= src_eqv_cost
6562 && src_cost <= src_related_cost
6563 && src_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6564 trial = src, src_cost = 10000;
6565 else if (src_eqv_cost <= src_related_cost
6566 && src_eqv_cost <= src_elt_cost)
0af62b41 6567 trial = copy_rtx (src_eqv_here), src_eqv_cost = 10000;
7afe21cc 6568 else if (src_related_cost <= src_elt_cost)
0af62b41 6569 trial = copy_rtx (src_related), src_related_cost = 10000;
7afe21cc
RK
6570 else
6571 {
05c33dd8 6572 trial = copy_rtx (elt->exp);
7afe21cc
RK
6573 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6574 src_elt_cost = 10000;
6575 }
6576
6577 /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
6578 check for this separately here. We will delete such an
6579 insn below.
6580
6581 Tablejump insns contain a USE of the table, so simply replacing
6582 the operand with the constant won't match. This is simply an
6583 unconditional branch, however, and is therefore valid. Just
6584 insert the substitution here and we will delete and re-emit
6585 the insn later. */
6586
6587 if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
6588 && (trial == pc_rtx
6589 || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
6590 && ! condjump_p (insn))))
6591 {
6592 /* If TRIAL is a label in front of a jump table, we are
6593 really falling through the switch (this is how casesi
6594 insns work), so we must branch around the table. */
6595 if (GET_CODE (trial) == CODE_LABEL
6596 && NEXT_INSN (trial) != 0
6597 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (trial)) == JUMP_INSN
6598 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
6599 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_VEC))
6600
6601 trial = gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, get_label_after (trial));
6602
6603 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
44333223 6604 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
7afe21cc
RK
6605 break;
6606 }
6607
6608 /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn. */
6609 else if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), trial, 0))
05c33dd8 6610 {
7722328e
RK
6611 /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see
6612 canon_reg. */
6613
6614 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
6615 canon_reg (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), insn),
6616 1);
6702af89 6617 apply_change_group ();
05c33dd8
RK
6618 break;
6619 }
7afe21cc
RK
6620
6621 /* If we previously found constant pool entries for
6622 constants and this is a constant, try making a
6623 pool entry. Put it in src_folded unless we already have done
6624 this since that is where it likely came from. */
6625
6626 else if (constant_pool_entries_cost
6627 && CONSTANT_P (trial)
6628 && (src_folded == 0 || GET_CODE (src_folded) != MEM)
6629 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
6630 {
6631 src_folded_force_flag = 1;
6632 src_folded = trial;
6633 src_folded_cost = constant_pool_entries_cost;
6634 }
6635 }
6636
6637 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
6638
6639 /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
6640 However, there is an important exception: If both are registers
6641 that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
6642 with the head of the class. If we do not do this, we will have
6643 both registers live over a portion of the basic block. This way,
6644 their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping. */
6645 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG
6646 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
6647 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == GET_MODE (dest)
6648 && qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] != REGNO (dest)
6649 && GET_CODE (src) == REG && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
6650 /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
6651 SET_SRC. */
6652 && (GET_CODE (sets[i].src) != REG
6653 || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
6654 /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
6655 SRC is a hard register. */
6656 {
6657 int first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (src)]];
6658
6659 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl)
6660 = first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
6661 : gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (src), first);
6662
6663 /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
6664 setting SRC to, use that constant. We ignored it when we
6665 thought we could make this into a no-op. */
6666 if (src_const && COST (src_const) < COST (src)
6667 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_const, 0))
6668 src = src_const;
6669 }
6670
6671 /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values. */
6672 if (src != sets[i].src)
6673 {
6674 do_not_record = 0;
6675 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
6676 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
6677 sets[i].src = src;
2197a88a 6678 sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
6679 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
6680 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
6681 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
2197a88a 6682 sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
6683 }
6684
6685 /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
6686 equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_NOTE. We don't want
6687 to write a REG_EQUAL note for a constant pseudo since verifying that
d45cf215 6688 that pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a pain. Such a note also
7afe21cc
RK
6689 won't help anything. */
6690 if (n_sets == 1 && src_const && GET_CODE (dest) == REG
6691 && GET_CODE (src_const) != REG)
6692 {
92f9aa51 6693 tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6694
6695 /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note, making
6696 a new one if one does not already exist. */
6697 if (tem)
6698 XEXP (tem, 0) = src_const;
6699 else
6700 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_EQUAL,
6701 src_const, REG_NOTES (insn));
6702
6703 /* If storing a constant value in a register that
6704 previously held the constant value 0,
6705 record this fact with a REG_WAS_0 note on this insn.
6706
6707 Note that the *register* is required to have previously held 0,
6708 not just any register in the quantity and we must point to the
6709 insn that set that register to zero.
6710
6711 Rather than track each register individually, we just see if
6712 the last set for this quantity was for this register. */
6713
6714 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
6715 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == const0_rtx)
6716 {
6717 /* See if we previously had a REG_WAS_0 note. */
906c4e36 6718 rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
6719 rtx const_insn = qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]];
6720
6721 if ((tem = single_set (const_insn)) != 0
6722 && rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (tem), dest))
6723 {
6724 if (note)
6725 XEXP (note, 0) = const_insn;
6726 else
6727 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (INSN_LIST, REG_WAS_0,
6728 const_insn, REG_NOTES (insn));
6729 }
6730 }
6731 }
6732
6733 /* Now deal with the destination. */
6734 do_not_record = 0;
6735 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6736
6737 /* Look within any SIGN_EXTRACT or ZERO_EXTRACT
6738 to the MEM or REG within it. */
6739 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
6740 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6741 || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6742 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6743 {
6744 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &XEXP (dest, 0);
6745 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6746 }
6747
6748 sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
6749
6750 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6751 {
6752 dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
6753
6754 /* Decide whether we invalidate everything in memory,
6755 or just things at non-fixed places.
6756 Writing a large aggregate must invalidate everything
6757 because we don't know how long it is. */
6758 note_mem_written (dest, &writes_memory);
6759 }
6760
6761 /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
6762 before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
6763 since the register values used in the address computation
6764 are those before this instruction. */
2197a88a 6765 sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
6766
6767 /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
6768 because the value in it after the store
6769 may not equal what was stored, due to truncation. */
6770
6771 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6772 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6773 {
6774 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
6775
6776 if (src_const != 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
6777 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
906c4e36
RK
6778 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
6779 && ! (INTVAL (src_const)
6780 & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
7afe21cc
RK
6781 /* Exception: if the value is constant,
6782 and it won't be truncated, record it. */
6783 ;
6784 else
6785 {
6786 /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
6787 but no new value will be recorded.
6788 We must invalidate because sometimes constant
6789 values can be recorded for bitfields. */
6790 sets[i].src_elt = 0;
6791 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
6792 src_eqv = 0;
6793 src_eqv_elt = 0;
6794 }
6795 }
6796
6797 /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
6798 the insn. */
6799 else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
6800 {
6801 PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
6802 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
6803 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
6804 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6805 /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to. */
6806 --LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (insn));
6807 /* No more processing for this set. */
6808 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6809 }
6810
6811 /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
6812 be a conditional or computed branch. So we see if we can follow
6813 it. If it was a computed branch, delete it and re-emit. */
6814 else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF)
6815 {
6816 rtx p;
6817
6818 /* If this is not in the format for a simple branch and
6819 we are the only SET in it, re-emit it. */
6820 if (! simplejump_p (insn) && n_sets == 1)
6821 {
6822 rtx new = emit_jump_insn_before (gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0)), insn);
6823 JUMP_LABEL (new) = XEXP (src, 0);
6824 LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
6825 delete_insn (insn);
6826 insn = new;
6827 }
31dcf83f
RS
6828 else
6829 /* Otherwise, force rerecognition, since it probably had
6830 a different pattern before.
6831 This shouldn't really be necessary, since whatever
6832 changed the source value above should have done this.
6833 Until the right place is found, might as well do this here. */
6834 INSN_CODE (insn) = -1;
7afe21cc
RK
6835
6836 /* Now that we've converted this jump to an unconditional jump,
6837 there is dead code after it. Delete the dead code until we
6838 reach a BARRIER, the end of the function, or a label. Do
6839 not delete NOTEs except for NOTE_INSN_DELETED since later
6840 phases assume these notes are retained. */
6841
6842 p = insn;
6843
6844 while (NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6845 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != BARRIER
6846 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != CODE_LABEL)
6847 {
6848 if (GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != NOTE
6849 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (NEXT_INSN (p)) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)
6850 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6851 else
6852 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
6853 }
6854
6855 /* If we don't have a BARRIER immediately after INSN, put one there.
6856 Much code assumes that there are no NOTEs between a JUMP_INSN and
6857 BARRIER. */
6858
6859 if (NEXT_INSN (insn) == 0
6860 || GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (insn)) != BARRIER)
6861 emit_barrier_after (insn);
6862
6863 /* We might have two BARRIERs separated by notes. Delete the second
6864 one if so. */
6865
538b78e7
RS
6866 if (p != insn && NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6867 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) == BARRIER)
7afe21cc
RK
6868 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6869
6870 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6871 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6872 }
6873
c2a47e48
RK
6874 /* If destination is volatile, invalidate it and then do no further
6875 processing for this assignment. */
7afe21cc
RK
6876
6877 else if (do_not_record)
c2a47e48
RK
6878 {
6879 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6880 || GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6881 invalidate (dest);
2708da92
RS
6882 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6883 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
6884 invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0));
c2a47e48
RK
6885 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6886 }
7afe21cc
RK
6887
6888 if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
2197a88a 6889 sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
7afe21cc
RK
6890
6891#ifdef HAVE_cc0
6892 /* If setting CC0, record what it was set to, or a constant, if it
6893 is equivalent to a constant. If it is being set to a floating-point
6894 value, make a COMPARE with the appropriate constant of 0. If we
6895 don't do this, later code can interpret this as a test against
6896 const0_rtx, which can cause problems if we try to put it into an
6897 insn as a floating-point operand. */
6898 if (dest == cc0_rtx)
6899 {
6900 this_insn_cc0 = src_const && mode != VOIDmode ? src_const : src;
6901 this_insn_cc0_mode = mode;
cbf6a543 6902 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
7afe21cc
RK
6903 this_insn_cc0 = gen_rtx (COMPARE, VOIDmode, this_insn_cc0,
6904 CONST0_RTX (mode));
6905 }
6906#endif
6907 }
6908
6909 /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
6910 if they are not already present.
6911 Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
6912 This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
6913 the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
6914 (having been invalidated). */
6915
6916 if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
6917 && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
6918 {
6919 register struct table_elt *elt;
6920 register struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
6921 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6922 enum machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
6923
6924 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6925 {
6926 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
6927 classp = 0;
6928 }
6929 if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
2197a88a
RK
6930 src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
6931 elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
7afe21cc
RK
6932 elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
6933 elt->in_struct = src_eqv_in_struct;
6934 src_eqv_elt = elt;
f7911249
JW
6935
6936 /* Check to see if src_eqv_elt is the same as a set source which
6937 does not yet have an elt, and if so set the elt of the set source
6938 to src_eqv_elt. */
6939 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6940 if (sets[i].rtl && sets[i].src_elt == 0
6941 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_eqv))
6942 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
7afe21cc
RK
6943 }
6944
6945 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6946 if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
6947 && ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
6948 {
6949 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6950 {
6951 /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
6952 gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
6953 not just for the subreg being stored in now.
6954 This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
6955 to treat the entire reg as the destination. */
6956 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
2197a88a 6957 sets[i].src_hash = src_eqv_hash;
7afe21cc
RK
6958 }
6959 else
6960 {
6961 /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
6962 already present. */
6963 register struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
6964 register rtx src = sets[i].src;
6965 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6966 enum machine_mode mode
6967 = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
6968
6969 if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6970 {
6971 register struct table_elt *elt;
6972
6973 /* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
6974 any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
6975 match if not still valid. */
6976 if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
2197a88a
RK
6977 sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
6978 elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
6979 elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
6980 elt->in_struct = sets[i].src_in_struct;
6981 sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
6982 }
6983
6984 if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
6985 && src != sets[i].src_const
6986 && ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
6987 sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
2197a88a 6988 sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
7afe21cc
RK
6989 }
6990 }
6991 else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6992 /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
6993 volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
6994 so that the destination goes into that class. */
6995 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6996
6997 invalidate_from_clobbers (&writes_memory, x);
77fa0940
RK
6998
6999 /* Some registers are invalidated by subroutine calls. Memory is
7000 invalidated by non-constant calls. */
7001
7afe21cc
RK
7002 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
7003 {
7004 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
77fa0940
RK
7005
7006 if (! CONST_CALL_P (insn))
7007 invalidate_memory (&everything);
7afe21cc
RK
7008 invalidate_for_call ();
7009 }
7010
7011 /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
7012 If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
7013 sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
7014 a part of which is being set. */
7015
7016 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
7017 if (sets[i].rtl)
7018 {
7019 register rtx dest = sets[i].inner_dest;
7020
7021 /* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
7022 previous quantity's chain.
7023 Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
7024 we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those. */
7025 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
7026 || (! writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
7027 invalidate (dest);
2708da92
RS
7028 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7029 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7030 invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0));
7afe21cc
RK
7031 }
7032
7033 /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
7034 are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
7035 This removes from the hash table
7036 any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
7037
7038 We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
7039 we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally. */
7040
7041 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
7042 if (sets[i].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) != REG)
7043 mention_regs (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
7044
7045 /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
7046 So replace each one with the current head of the same class. */
7047
7048 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
7049 if (sets[i].rtl)
7050 {
7051 if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
7052 /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
7053 or 0 if nothing remains of that class. */
7054 {
7055 register struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
7056
7057 while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
7058 elt = elt->prev_same_value;
7059
7060 while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
7061 elt = elt->next_same_value;
7062 sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
7063 }
7064 }
7065
7066 /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes. */
7067
7068 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
7069 if (sets[i].rtl)
7070 {
7071 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
7072 register struct table_elt *elt;
7073
7074 /* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
7075 floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
7076 memory. */
7077 if ((flag_float_store
7078 && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
cbf6a543 7079 && FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest)))
7afe21cc
RK
7080 /* Don't record values of destinations set inside a libcall block
7081 since we might delete the libcall. Things should have been set
7082 up so we won't want to reuse such a value, but we play it safe
7083 here. */
7084 || in_libcall_block
7085 /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
7086 table, there is no point is recording DEST. */
7087 || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
7088 continue;
7089
7090 /* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
7091 and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
7092 Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT. */
7093 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
7094 dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
7095
c610adec 7096 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
7afe21cc
RK
7097 /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities. */
7098 if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
7099 /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
7100 recalculated. */
2197a88a 7101 sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
7afe21cc
RK
7102
7103 elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
2197a88a 7104 sets[i].dest_hash, GET_MODE (dest));
7afe21cc
RK
7105 elt->in_memory = GET_CODE (sets[i].inner_dest) == MEM;
7106 if (elt->in_memory)
7107 {
7108 /* This implicitly assumes a whole struct
7109 need not have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P.
7110 But a whole struct is *supposed* to have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P. */
7111 elt->in_struct = (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
7112 || sets[i].inner_dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
7113 }
7114
fc3ffe83
RK
7115 /* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is no
7116 narrower than M2, and both M1 and M2 are the same number of words,
7117 we are also doing (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1) 0)) so
7118 make that equivalence as well.
7afe21cc
RK
7119
7120 However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart_if_possible
7121 will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart_if_possible applied to
7122 BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
7123 BAR's equivalences. If we don't get a simplified form, make
7124 the SUBREG. It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
7125 cause two similar assignments to be detected.
7126
7127 Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
7128 already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table. */
7129
7130 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
fc3ffe83
RK
7131 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) / UNITS_PER_WORD
7132 == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
7afe21cc
RK
7133 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
7134 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))))
7135 && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
7136 {
7137 enum machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
7138 struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
7139
7140 for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
7141 elt = elt->next_same_value)
7142 {
7143 rtx new_src = 0;
2197a88a 7144 unsigned src_hash;
7afe21cc
RK
7145 struct table_elt *src_elt;
7146
7147 /* Ignore invalid entries. */
7148 if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
7149 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
7150 continue;
7151
7152 new_src = gen_lowpart_if_possible (new_mode, elt->exp);
7153 if (new_src == 0)
7154 new_src = gen_rtx (SUBREG, new_mode, elt->exp, 0);
7155
7156 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
7157 src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
7158
7159 /* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
7160 already. */
7161 if (src_elt == 0)
7162 {
7163 if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
7164 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
7165 src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
7166 src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
7167 src_elt->in_struct = elt->in_struct;
7168 }
7169 else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
7170 /* Show that two things that we've seen before are
7171 actually the same. */
7172 merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
7173
7174 classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
7175 }
7176 }
7177 }
7178
7179 /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1)
7180 where REG0 is the "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.
7181 After cse, REG1 will probably not be used in the sequel,
7182 so (if easily done) change this insn to (set REG1 REG0) and
7183 replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn that computed their value.
7184 Then REG1 will become a dead store and won't cloud the situation
7185 for later optimizations.
7186
7187 Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
7188 then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
7189 into a three-operand insn.
7190
7191 Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN. */
7192
7193 if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
7194 && NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) == insn
7195 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
7196 && REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7197 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
7198 && (qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))]]
7199 == REGNO (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl))))
7200 {
7201 rtx prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
7202 while (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == NOTE)
7203 prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
7204
7205 if (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
7206 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
7207 {
7208 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
906c4e36 7209 rtx note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
7210
7211 validate_change (prev, & SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
7212 validate_change (insn, & SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl),
7213 SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), 1);
7214 validate_change (insn, & SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), dest, 1);
7215 apply_change_group ();
7216
7217 /* If REG1 was equivalent to a constant, REG0 is not. */
7218 if (note)
7219 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_EQUAL);
7220
7221 /* If there was a REG_WAS_0 note on PREV, remove it. Move
7222 any REG_WAS_0 note on INSN to PREV. */
906c4e36 7223 note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
7224 if (note)
7225 remove_note (prev, note);
7226
906c4e36 7227 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
7228 if (note)
7229 {
7230 remove_note (insn, note);
7231 XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (prev);
7232 REG_NOTES (prev) = note;
7233 }
7234 }
7235 }
7236
7237 /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known equivalences due to
7238 the condition being tested. */
7239
7240 last_jump_equiv_class = 0;
7241 if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN
7242 && n_sets == 1 && GET_CODE (x) == SET
7243 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == IF_THEN_ELSE)
7244 record_jump_equiv (insn, 0);
7245
7246#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7247 /* If the previous insn set CC0 and this insn no longer references CC0,
7248 delete the previous insn. Here we use the fact that nothing expects CC0
7249 to be valid over an insn, which is true until the final pass. */
7250 if (prev_insn && GET_CODE (prev_insn) == INSN
7251 && (tem = single_set (prev_insn)) != 0
7252 && SET_DEST (tem) == cc0_rtx
7253 && ! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, x))
7254 {
7255 PUT_CODE (prev_insn, NOTE);
7256 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (prev_insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
7257 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (prev_insn) = 0;
7258 }
7259
7260 prev_insn_cc0 = this_insn_cc0;
7261 prev_insn_cc0_mode = this_insn_cc0_mode;
7262#endif
7263
7264 prev_insn = insn;
7265}
7266\f
7267/* Store 1 in *WRITES_PTR for those categories of memory ref
7268 that must be invalidated when the expression WRITTEN is stored in.
7269 If WRITTEN is null, say everything must be invalidated. */
7270
7271static void
7272note_mem_written (written, writes_ptr)
7273 rtx written;
7274 struct write_data *writes_ptr;
7275{
7276 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
7277
7278 if (written == 0)
7279 *writes_ptr = everything;
7280 else if (GET_CODE (written) == MEM)
7281 {
7282 /* Pushing or popping the stack invalidates just the stack pointer. */
7283 rtx addr = XEXP (written, 0);
7284 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
7285 || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
7286 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
7287 && REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
7288 {
7289 writes_ptr->sp = 1;
7290 return;
7291 }
7292 else if (GET_MODE (written) == BLKmode)
7293 *writes_ptr = everything;
76fb0b60
RS
7294 /* (mem (scratch)) means clobber everything. */
7295 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == SCRATCH)
7296 *writes_ptr = everything;
7afe21cc
RK
7297 else if (cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (written))
7298 {
7299 /* A varying address that is a sum indicates an array element,
7300 and that's just as good as a structure element
2d08d5b6
JW
7301 in implying that we need not invalidate scalar variables.
7302 However, we must allow QImode aliasing of scalars, because the
7303 ANSI C standard allows character pointers to alias anything. */
7304 if (! ((MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (written)
7305 || GET_CODE (XEXP (written, 0)) == PLUS)
7306 && GET_MODE (written) != QImode))
7afe21cc
RK
7307 writes_ptr->all = 1;
7308 writes_ptr->nonscalar = 1;
7309 }
7310 writes_ptr->var = 1;
7311 }
7312}
7313
7314/* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about an insn
7315 except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
7316 This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
7317 alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.
7318
7319 W points to the writes_memory for this insn, a struct write_data
7320 saying which kinds of memory references must be invalidated.
7321 X is the pattern of the insn. */
7322
7323static void
7324invalidate_from_clobbers (w, x)
7325 struct write_data *w;
7326 rtx x;
7327{
7328 /* If W->var is not set, W specifies no action.
7329 If W->all is set, this step gets all memory refs
7330 so they can be ignored in the rest of this function. */
7331 if (w->var)
7332 invalidate_memory (w);
7333
7334 if (w->sp)
7335 {
7336 if (reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM] >= 0)
7337 reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM]++;
7338
7339 /* This should be *very* rare. */
7340 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM))
7341 invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx);
7342 }
7343
7344 if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
7345 {
7346 rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
2708da92
RS
7347 if (ref)
7348 {
7349 if (GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
7350 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && ! w->all))
7351 invalidate (ref);
7352 else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7353 || GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7354 invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0));
7355 }
7afe21cc
RK
7356 }
7357 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
7358 {
7359 register int i;
7360 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7361 {
7362 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
7363 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
7364 {
7365 rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
2708da92
RS
7366 if (ref)
7367 {
7368 if (GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
7369 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && !w->all))
7370 invalidate (ref);
7371 else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7372 || GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7373 invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0));
7374 }
7afe21cc
RK
7375 }
7376 }
7377 }
7378}
7379\f
7380/* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn. Look at any REG_EQUAL notes
7381 and replace any registers in them with either an equivalent constant
7382 or the canonical form of the register. If we are inside an address,
7383 only do this if the address remains valid.
7384
7385 OBJECT is 0 except when within a MEM in which case it is the MEM.
7386
7387 Return the replacement for X. */
7388
7389static rtx
7390cse_process_notes (x, object)
7391 rtx x;
7392 rtx object;
7393{
7394 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7395 char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
7afe21cc
RK
7396 int i;
7397
7398 switch (code)
7399 {
7400 case CONST_INT:
7401 case CONST:
7402 case SYMBOL_REF:
7403 case LABEL_REF:
7404 case CONST_DOUBLE:
7405 case PC:
7406 case CC0:
7407 case LO_SUM:
7408 return x;
7409
7410 case MEM:
7411 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), x);
7412 return x;
7413
7414 case EXPR_LIST:
7415 case INSN_LIST:
7416 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
906c4e36 7417 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc 7418 if (XEXP (x, 1))
906c4e36 7419 XEXP (x, 1) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
7420 return x;
7421
e4890d45
RS
7422 case SIGN_EXTEND:
7423 case ZERO_EXTEND:
7424 {
7425 rtx new = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), object);
7426 /* We don't substitute VOIDmode constants into these rtx,
7427 since they would impede folding. */
7428 if (GET_MODE (new) != VOIDmode)
7429 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, 0), new, 0);
7430 return x;
7431 }
7432
7afe21cc
RK
7433 case REG:
7434 i = reg_qty[REGNO (x)];
7435
7436 /* Return a constant or a constant register. */
7437 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
7438 && qty_const[i] != 0
7439 && (CONSTANT_P (qty_const[i])
7440 || GET_CODE (qty_const[i]) == REG))
7441 {
7442 rtx new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[i]);
7443 if (new)
7444 return new;
7445 }
7446
7447 /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register. */
906c4e36 7448 return canon_reg (x, NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
7449 }
7450
7451 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
7452 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
7453 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, i),
7fe34fdf 7454 cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, i), object), 0);
7afe21cc
RK
7455
7456 return x;
7457}
7458\f
7459/* Find common subexpressions between the end test of a loop and the beginning
7460 of the loop. LOOP_START is the CODE_LABEL at the start of a loop.
7461
7462 Often we have a loop where an expression in the exit test is used
7463 in the body of the loop. For example "while (*p) *q++ = *p++;".
7464 Because of the way we duplicate the loop exit test in front of the loop,
7465 however, we don't detect that common subexpression. This will be caught
7466 when global cse is implemented, but this is a quite common case.
7467
7468 This function handles the most common cases of these common expressions.
7469 It is called after we have processed the basic block ending with the
7470 NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END note that ends a loop and the previous JUMP_INSN
7471 jumps to a label used only once. */
7472
7473static void
7474cse_around_loop (loop_start)
7475 rtx loop_start;
7476{
7477 rtx insn;
7478 int i;
7479 struct table_elt *p;
7480
7481 /* If the jump at the end of the loop doesn't go to the start, we don't
7482 do anything. */
7483 for (insn = PREV_INSN (loop_start);
7484 insn && (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) >= 0);
7485 insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
7486 ;
7487
7488 if (insn == 0
7489 || GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
7490 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) != NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG)
7491 return;
7492
7493 /* If the last insn of the loop (the end test) was an NE comparison,
7494 we will interpret it as an EQ comparison, since we fell through
f72aed24 7495 the loop. Any equivalences resulting from that comparison are
7afe21cc
RK
7496 therefore not valid and must be invalidated. */
7497 if (last_jump_equiv_class)
7498 for (p = last_jump_equiv_class->first_same_value; p;
7499 p = p->next_same_value)
7500 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == MEM || GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
7501 || GET_CODE (p->exp) == SUBREG)
7502 invalidate (p->exp);
2708da92
RS
7503 else if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7504 || GET_CODE (p->exp) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7505 invalidate (XEXP (p->exp, 0));
7afe21cc
RK
7506
7507 /* Process insns starting after LOOP_START until we hit a CALL_INSN or
7508 a CODE_LABEL (we could handle a CALL_INSN, but it isn't worth it).
7509
7510 The only thing we do with SET_DEST is invalidate entries, so we
7511 can safely process each SET in order. It is slightly less efficient
7512 to do so, but we only want to handle the most common cases. */
7513
7514 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (loop_start);
7515 GET_CODE (insn) != CALL_INSN && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL
7516 && ! (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE
7517 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END);
7518 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7519 {
7520 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
7521 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
7522 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == CLOBBER))
7523 cse_set_around_loop (PATTERN (insn), insn, loop_start);
7524 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
7525 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
7526 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7527 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == SET
7528 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
7529 cse_set_around_loop (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i), insn,
7530 loop_start);
7531 }
7532}
7533\f
8b3686ed
RK
7534/* Variable used for communications between the next two routines. */
7535
7536static struct write_data skipped_writes_memory;
7537
7538/* Process one SET of an insn that was skipped. We ignore CLOBBERs
7539 since they are done elsewhere. This function is called via note_stores. */
7540
7541static void
7542invalidate_skipped_set (dest, set)
7543 rtx set;
7544 rtx dest;
7545{
7546 if (GET_CODE (set) == CLOBBER
7547#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7548 || dest == cc0_rtx
7549#endif
7550 || dest == pc_rtx)
7551 return;
7552
7553 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
7554 note_mem_written (dest, &skipped_writes_memory);
7555
ffcf6393
RS
7556 /* There are times when an address can appear varying and be a PLUS
7557 during this scan when it would be a fixed address were we to know
7558 the proper equivalences. So promote "nonscalar" to be "all". */
7559 if (skipped_writes_memory.nonscalar)
7560 skipped_writes_memory.all = 1;
7561
8b3686ed
RK
7562 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
7563 || (! skipped_writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
7564 invalidate (dest);
2708da92
RS
7565 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7566 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7567 invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0));
8b3686ed
RK
7568}
7569
7570/* Invalidate all insns from START up to the end of the function or the
7571 next label. This called when we wish to CSE around a block that is
7572 conditionally executed. */
7573
7574static void
7575invalidate_skipped_block (start)
7576 rtx start;
7577{
7578 rtx insn;
8b3686ed
RK
7579 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
7580 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
7581
7582 for (insn = start; insn && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL;
7583 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7584 {
7585 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) != 'i')
7586 continue;
7587
7588 skipped_writes_memory = init;
7589
7590 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
7591 {
7592 invalidate_for_call ();
7593 skipped_writes_memory = everything;
7594 }
7595
7596 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), invalidate_skipped_set);
7597 invalidate_from_clobbers (&skipped_writes_memory, PATTERN (insn));
7598 }
7599}
7600\f
7afe21cc
RK
7601/* Used for communication between the following two routines; contains a
7602 value to be checked for modification. */
7603
7604static rtx cse_check_loop_start_value;
7605
7606/* If modifying X will modify the value in CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE,
7607 indicate that fact by setting CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE to 0. */
7608
7609static void
7610cse_check_loop_start (x, set)
7611 rtx x;
7612 rtx set;
7613{
7614 if (cse_check_loop_start_value == 0
7615 || GET_CODE (x) == CC0 || GET_CODE (x) == PC)
7616 return;
7617
7618 if ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (cse_check_loop_start_value) == MEM)
7619 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, cse_check_loop_start_value))
7620 cse_check_loop_start_value = 0;
7621}
7622
7623/* X is a SET or CLOBBER contained in INSN that was found near the start of
7624 a loop that starts with the label at LOOP_START.
7625
7626 If X is a SET, we see if its SET_SRC is currently in our hash table.
7627 If so, we see if it has a value equal to some register used only in the
7628 loop exit code (as marked by jump.c).
7629
7630 If those two conditions are true, we search backwards from the start of
7631 the loop to see if that same value was loaded into a register that still
7632 retains its value at the start of the loop.
7633
7634 If so, we insert an insn after the load to copy the destination of that
7635 load into the equivalent register and (try to) replace our SET_SRC with that
7636 register.
7637
7638 In any event, we invalidate whatever this SET or CLOBBER modifies. */
7639
7640static void
7641cse_set_around_loop (x, insn, loop_start)
7642 rtx x;
7643 rtx insn;
7644 rtx loop_start;
7645{
7afe21cc
RK
7646 struct table_elt *src_elt;
7647 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
7648 struct write_data writes_memory;
7649
7650 writes_memory = init;
7651
7652 /* If this is a SET, see if we can replace SET_SRC, but ignore SETs that
7653 are setting PC or CC0 or whose SET_SRC is already a register. */
7654 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET
7655 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
7656 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != REG)
7657 {
7658 src_elt = lookup (SET_SRC (x),
7659 HASH (SET_SRC (x), GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x))),
7660 GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)));
7661
7662 if (src_elt)
7663 for (src_elt = src_elt->first_same_value; src_elt;
7664 src_elt = src_elt->next_same_value)
7665 if (GET_CODE (src_elt->exp) == REG && REG_LOOP_TEST_P (src_elt->exp)
7666 && COST (src_elt->exp) < COST (SET_SRC (x)))
7667 {
7668 rtx p, set;
7669
7670 /* Look for an insn in front of LOOP_START that sets
7671 something in the desired mode to SET_SRC (x) before we hit
7672 a label or CALL_INSN. */
7673
7674 for (p = prev_nonnote_insn (loop_start);
7675 p && GET_CODE (p) != CALL_INSN
7676 && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL;
7677 p = prev_nonnote_insn (p))
7678 if ((set = single_set (p)) != 0
7679 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == REG
7680 && GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == src_elt->mode
7681 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (set), SET_SRC (x)))
7682 {
7683 /* We now have to ensure that nothing between P
7684 and LOOP_START modified anything referenced in
7685 SET_SRC (x). We know that nothing within the loop
7686 can modify it, or we would have invalidated it in
7687 the hash table. */
7688 rtx q;
7689
7690 cse_check_loop_start_value = SET_SRC (x);
7691 for (q = p; q != loop_start; q = NEXT_INSN (q))
7692 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (q)) == 'i')
7693 note_stores (PATTERN (q), cse_check_loop_start);
7694
7695 /* If nothing was changed and we can replace our
7696 SET_SRC, add an insn after P to copy its destination
7697 to what we will be replacing SET_SRC with. */
7698 if (cse_check_loop_start_value
7699 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (x),
7700 src_elt->exp, 0))
7701 emit_insn_after (gen_move_insn (src_elt->exp,
7702 SET_DEST (set)),
7703 p);
7704 break;
7705 }
7706 }
7707 }
7708
7709 /* Now invalidate anything modified by X. */
7710 note_mem_written (SET_DEST (x), &writes_memory);
7711
7712 if (writes_memory.var)
7713 invalidate_memory (&writes_memory);
7714
7715 /* See comment on similar code in cse_insn for explanation of these tests. */
7716 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
7717 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == MEM && ! writes_memory.all
7718 && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (SET_DEST (x))))
7719 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
2708da92
RS
7720 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7721 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
7722 invalidate (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0));
7afe21cc
RK
7723}
7724\f
7725/* Find the end of INSN's basic block and return its range,
7726 the total number of SETs in all the insns of the block, the last insn of the
7727 block, and the branch path.
7728
7729 The branch path indicates which branches should be followed. If a non-zero
7730 path size is specified, the block should be rescanned and a different set
7731 of branches will be taken. The branch path is only used if
8b3686ed 7732 FLAG_CSE_FOLLOW_JUMPS or FLAG_CSE_SKIP_BLOCKS is non-zero.
7afe21cc
RK
7733
7734 DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, defined below, that is
7735 used to describe the block. It is filled in with the information about
7736 the current block. The incoming structure's branch path, if any, is used
7737 to construct the output branch path. */
7738
7afe21cc 7739void
8b3686ed 7740cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, data, follow_jumps, after_loop, skip_blocks)
7afe21cc
RK
7741 rtx insn;
7742 struct cse_basic_block_data *data;
7743 int follow_jumps;
7744 int after_loop;
8b3686ed 7745 int skip_blocks;
7afe21cc
RK
7746{
7747 rtx p = insn, q;
7748 int nsets = 0;
7749 int low_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn), high_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn);
fc3ffe83 7750 rtx next = GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i' ? insn : next_real_insn (insn);
7afe21cc
RK
7751 int path_size = data->path_size;
7752 int path_entry = 0;
7753 int i;
7754
7755 /* Update the previous branch path, if any. If the last branch was
7756 previously TAKEN, mark it NOT_TAKEN. If it was previously NOT_TAKEN,
7757 shorten the path by one and look at the previous branch. We know that
7758 at least one branch must have been taken if PATH_SIZE is non-zero. */
7759 while (path_size > 0)
7760 {
8b3686ed 7761 if (data->path[path_size - 1].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7762 {
7763 data->path[path_size - 1].status = NOT_TAKEN;
7764 break;
7765 }
7766 else
7767 path_size--;
7768 }
7769
7770 /* Scan to end of this basic block. */
7771 while (p && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL)
7772 {
7773 /* Don't cse out the end of a loop. This makes a difference
7774 only for the unusual loops that always execute at least once;
7775 all other loops have labels there so we will stop in any case.
7776 Cse'ing out the end of the loop is dangerous because it
7777 might cause an invariant expression inside the loop
7778 to be reused after the end of the loop. This would make it
7779 hard to move the expression out of the loop in loop.c,
7780 especially if it is one of several equivalent expressions
7781 and loop.c would like to eliminate it.
7782
7783 If we are running after loop.c has finished, we can ignore
7784 the NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END. */
7785
7786 if (! after_loop && GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7787 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END)
7788 break;
7789
7790 /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg vax)
7791 the regs restored by the longjmp come from
7792 a later time than the setjmp. */
7793 if (GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7794 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7795 break;
7796
7797 /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
7798 especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS. */
7799 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p)) == 'i'
7800 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == PARALLEL)
7801 nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (p), 0);
7802 else if (GET_CODE (p) != NOTE)
7803 nsets += 1;
7804
164c8956
RK
7805 /* Ignore insns made by CSE; they cannot affect the boundaries of
7806 the basic block. */
7807
7808 if (INSN_UID (p) <= max_uid && INSN_CUID (p) > high_cuid)
8b3686ed 7809 high_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
164c8956
RK
7810 if (INSN_UID (p) <= max_uid && INSN_CUID (p) < low_cuid)
7811 low_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
7afe21cc
RK
7812
7813 /* See if this insn is in our branch path. If it is and we are to
7814 take it, do so. */
7815 if (path_entry < path_size && data->path[path_entry].branch == p)
7816 {
8b3686ed 7817 if (data->path[path_entry].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7818 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7819
7820 /* Point to next entry in path, if any. */
7821 path_entry++;
7822 }
7823
7824 /* If this is a conditional jump, we can follow it if -fcse-follow-jumps
7825 was specified, we haven't reached our maximum path length, there are
7826 insns following the target of the jump, this is the only use of the
8b3686ed
RK
7827 jump label, and the target label is preceded by a BARRIER.
7828
7829 Alternatively, we can follow the jump if it branches around a
7830 block of code and there are no other branches into the block.
7831 In this case invalidate_skipped_block will be called to invalidate any
7832 registers set in the block when following the jump. */
7833
7834 else if ((follow_jumps || skip_blocks) && path_size < PATHLENGTH - 1
7afe21cc
RK
7835 && GET_CODE (p) == JUMP_INSN
7836 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == SET
7837 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (p))) == IF_THEN_ELSE
7838 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (p)) == 1
7839 && NEXT_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)) != 0)
7840 {
7841 for (q = PREV_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)); q; q = PREV_INSN (q))
7842 if ((GET_CODE (q) != NOTE
7843 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
7844 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7845 && (GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL || LABEL_NUSES (q) != 0))
7846 break;
7847
7848 /* If we ran into a BARRIER, this code is an extension of the
7849 basic block when the branch is taken. */
8b3686ed 7850 if (follow_jumps && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) == BARRIER)
7afe21cc
RK
7851 {
7852 /* Don't allow ourself to keep walking around an
7853 always-executed loop. */
fc3ffe83
RK
7854 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7855 {
7856 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7857 continue;
7858 }
7afe21cc
RK
7859
7860 /* Similarly, don't put a branch in our path more than once. */
7861 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7862 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7863 break;
7864
7865 if (i != path_entry)
7866 break;
7867
7868 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7869 data->path[path_entry++].status = TAKEN;
7870
7871 /* This branch now ends our path. It was possible that we
7872 didn't see this branch the last time around (when the
7873 insn in front of the target was a JUMP_INSN that was
7874 turned into a no-op). */
7875 path_size = path_entry;
7876
7877 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7878 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7879 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7880 }
8b3686ed
RK
7881 /* Detect a branch around a block of code. */
7882 else if (skip_blocks && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL)
7883 {
7884 register rtx tmp;
7885
fc3ffe83
RK
7886 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7887 {
7888 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7889 continue;
7890 }
8b3686ed
RK
7891
7892 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7893 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7894 break;
7895
7896 if (i != path_entry)
7897 break;
7898
7899 /* This is no_labels_between_p (p, q) with an added check for
7900 reaching the end of a function (in case Q precedes P). */
7901 for (tmp = NEXT_INSN (p); tmp && tmp != q; tmp = NEXT_INSN (tmp))
7902 if (GET_CODE (tmp) == CODE_LABEL)
7903 break;
7904
7905 if (tmp == q)
7906 {
7907 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7908 data->path[path_entry++].status = AROUND;
7909
7910 path_size = path_entry;
7911
7912 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7913 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7914 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7915 }
7916 }
7afe21cc 7917 }
7afe21cc
RK
7918 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7919 }
7920
7921 data->low_cuid = low_cuid;
7922 data->high_cuid = high_cuid;
7923 data->nsets = nsets;
7924 data->last = p;
7925
7926 /* If all jumps in the path are not taken, set our path length to zero
7927 so a rescan won't be done. */
7928 for (i = path_size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8b3686ed 7929 if (data->path[i].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7930 break;
7931
7932 if (i == -1)
7933 data->path_size = 0;
7934 else
7935 data->path_size = path_size;
7936
7937 /* End the current branch path. */
7938 data->path[path_size].branch = 0;
7939}
7940\f
7afe21cc
RK
7941/* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
7942 F is the first instruction.
7943 NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
7944
7945 AFTER_LOOP is 1 if this is the cse call done after loop optimization
7946 (only if -frerun-cse-after-loop).
7947
7948 Returns 1 if jump_optimize should be redone due to simplifications
7949 in conditional jump instructions. */
7950
7951int
7952cse_main (f, nregs, after_loop, file)
7953 rtx f;
7954 int nregs;
7955 int after_loop;
7956 FILE *file;
7957{
7958 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
7959 register rtx insn = f;
7960 register int i;
7961
7962 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
7963 constant_pool_entries_cost = 0;
7964 val.path_size = 0;
7965
7966 init_recog ();
7967
7968 max_reg = nregs;
7969
7970 all_minus_one = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7971 consec_ints = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7972
7973 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
7974 {
7975 all_minus_one[i] = -1;
7976 consec_ints[i] = i;
7977 }
7978
7979 reg_next_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7980 reg_prev_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7981 reg_qty = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7982 reg_in_table = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7983 reg_tick = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7984
7bac1be0
RK
7985#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
7986
7987 /* Allocate scratch rtl here. cse_insn will fill in the memory reference
7988 and change the code and mode as appropriate. */
7989 memory_extend_rtx = gen_rtx (ZERO_EXTEND, VOIDmode, 0);
7990#endif
7991
7afe21cc
RK
7992 /* Discard all the free elements of the previous function
7993 since they are allocated in the temporarily obstack. */
7994 bzero (table, sizeof table);
7995 free_element_chain = 0;
7996 n_elements_made = 0;
7997
7998 /* Find the largest uid. */
7999
164c8956
RK
8000 max_uid = get_max_uid ();
8001 uid_cuid = (int *) alloca ((max_uid + 1) * sizeof (int));
8002 bzero (uid_cuid, (max_uid + 1) * sizeof (int));
7afe21cc
RK
8003
8004 /* Compute the mapping from uids to cuids.
8005 CUIDs are numbers assigned to insns, like uids,
8006 except that cuids increase monotonically through the code.
8007 Don't assign cuids to line-number NOTEs, so that the distance in cuids
8008 between two insns is not affected by -g. */
8009
8010 for (insn = f, i = 0; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
8011 {
8012 if (GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
8013 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) < 0)
8014 INSN_CUID (insn) = ++i;
8015 else
8016 /* Give a line number note the same cuid as preceding insn. */
8017 INSN_CUID (insn) = i;
8018 }
8019
8020 /* Initialize which registers are clobbered by calls. */
8021
8022 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call);
8023
8024 for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
8025 if ((call_used_regs[i]
8026 /* Used to check !fixed_regs[i] here, but that isn't safe;
8027 fixed regs are still call-clobbered, and sched can get
8028 confused if they can "live across calls".
8029
8030 The frame pointer is always preserved across calls. The arg
8031 pointer is if it is fixed. The stack pointer usually is, unless
8032 RETURN_POPS_ARGS, in which case an explicit CLOBBER
8033 will be present. If we are generating PIC code, the PIC offset
8034 table register is preserved across calls. */
8035
8036 && i != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
8037 && i != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
8bc169f2
DE
8038#if HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
8039 && i != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
8040#endif
7afe21cc
RK
8041#if ARG_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
8042 && ! (i == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[i])
8043#endif
be8fe470 8044#if defined (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM) && !defined (PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED)
7afe21cc
RK
8045 && ! (i == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM && flag_pic)
8046#endif
8047 )
8048 || global_regs[i])
8049 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i);
8050
8051 /* Loop over basic blocks.
8052 Compute the maximum number of qty's needed for each basic block
8053 (which is 2 for each SET). */
8054 insn = f;
8055 while (insn)
8056 {
8b3686ed
RK
8057 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, flag_cse_follow_jumps, after_loop,
8058 flag_cse_skip_blocks);
7afe21cc
RK
8059
8060 /* If this basic block was already processed or has no sets, skip it. */
8061 if (val.nsets == 0 || GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
8062 {
8063 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
8064 insn = (val.last ? NEXT_INSN (val.last) : 0);
8065 val.path_size = 0;
8066 continue;
8067 }
8068
8069 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
8070 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
8071 max_qty = val.nsets * 2;
8072
8073 if (file)
8074 fprintf (file, ";; Processing block from %d to %d, %d sets.\n",
8075 INSN_UID (insn), val.last ? INSN_UID (val.last) : 0,
8076 val.nsets);
8077
8078 /* Make MAX_QTY bigger to give us room to optimize
8079 past the end of this basic block, if that should prove useful. */
8080 if (max_qty < 500)
8081 max_qty = 500;
8082
8083 max_qty += max_reg;
8084
8085 /* If this basic block is being extended by following certain jumps,
8086 (see `cse_end_of_basic_block'), we reprocess the code from the start.
8087 Otherwise, we start after this basic block. */
8088 if (val.path_size > 0)
8089 cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, 0);
8090 else
8091 {
8092 int old_cse_jumps_altered = cse_jumps_altered;
8093 rtx temp;
8094
8095 /* When cse changes a conditional jump to an unconditional
8096 jump, we want to reprocess the block, since it will give
8097 us a new branch path to investigate. */
8098 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
8099 temp = cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, ! after_loop);
8b3686ed
RK
8100 if (cse_jumps_altered == 0
8101 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
7afe21cc
RK
8102 insn = temp;
8103
8104 cse_jumps_altered |= old_cse_jumps_altered;
8105 }
8106
8107#ifdef USE_C_ALLOCA
8108 alloca (0);
8109#endif
8110 }
8111
8112 /* Tell refers_to_mem_p that qty_const info is not available. */
8113 qty_const = 0;
8114
8115 if (max_elements_made < n_elements_made)
8116 max_elements_made = n_elements_made;
8117
8118 return cse_jumps_altered;
8119}
8120
8121/* Process a single basic block. FROM and TO and the limits of the basic
8122 block. NEXT_BRANCH points to the branch path when following jumps or
8123 a null path when not following jumps.
8124
8125 AROUND_LOOP is non-zero if we are to try to cse around to the start of a
8126 loop. This is true when we are being called for the last time on a
8127 block and this CSE pass is before loop.c. */
8128
8129static rtx
8130cse_basic_block (from, to, next_branch, around_loop)
8131 register rtx from, to;
8132 struct branch_path *next_branch;
8133 int around_loop;
8134{
8135 register rtx insn;
8136 int to_usage = 0;
8137 int in_libcall_block = 0;
8138
8139 /* Each of these arrays is undefined before max_reg, so only allocate
8140 the space actually needed and adjust the start below. */
8141
8142 qty_first_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
8143 qty_last_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
8144 qty_mode= (enum machine_mode *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum machine_mode));
8145 qty_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
8146 qty_const_insn = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
8147 qty_comparison_code
8148 = (enum rtx_code *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum rtx_code));
8149 qty_comparison_qty = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
8150 qty_comparison_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
8151
8152 qty_first_reg -= max_reg;
8153 qty_last_reg -= max_reg;
8154 qty_mode -= max_reg;
8155 qty_const -= max_reg;
8156 qty_const_insn -= max_reg;
8157 qty_comparison_code -= max_reg;
8158 qty_comparison_qty -= max_reg;
8159 qty_comparison_const -= max_reg;
8160
8161 new_basic_block ();
8162
8163 /* TO might be a label. If so, protect it from being deleted. */
8164 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
8165 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
8166
8167 for (insn = from; insn != to; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
8168 {
8169 register enum rtx_code code;
8170
8171 /* See if this is a branch that is part of the path. If so, and it is
8172 to be taken, do so. */
8173 if (next_branch->branch == insn)
8174 {
8b3686ed
RK
8175 enum taken status = next_branch++->status;
8176 if (status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc 8177 {
8b3686ed
RK
8178 if (status == TAKEN)
8179 record_jump_equiv (insn, 1);
8180 else
8181 invalidate_skipped_block (NEXT_INSN (insn));
8182
7afe21cc
RK
8183 /* Set the last insn as the jump insn; it doesn't affect cc0.
8184 Then follow this branch. */
8185#ifdef HAVE_cc0
8186 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
8187#endif
8188 prev_insn = insn;
8189 insn = JUMP_LABEL (insn);
8190 continue;
8191 }
8192 }
8193
8194 code = GET_CODE (insn);
8195 if (GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
8196 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
8197
8198 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
8199 {
8200 /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms when
8201 looking for duplicate operations. */
8202
8203 if (REG_NOTES (insn))
906c4e36 8204 REG_NOTES (insn) = cse_process_notes (REG_NOTES (insn), NULL_RTX);
7afe21cc
RK
8205
8206 /* Track when we are inside in LIBCALL block. Inside such a block,
8207 we do not want to record destinations. The last insn of a
8208 LIBCALL block is not considered to be part of the block, since
830a38ee 8209 its destination is the result of the block and hence should be
7afe21cc
RK
8210 recorded. */
8211
906c4e36 8212 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, NULL_RTX))
7afe21cc 8213 in_libcall_block = 1;
906c4e36 8214 else if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, NULL_RTX))
7afe21cc
RK
8215 in_libcall_block = 0;
8216
8217 cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block);
8218 }
8219
8220 /* If INSN is now an unconditional jump, skip to the end of our
8221 basic block by pretending that we just did the last insn in the
8222 basic block. If we are jumping to the end of our block, show
8223 that we can have one usage of TO. */
8224
8225 if (simplejump_p (insn))
8226 {
8227 if (to == 0)
8228 return 0;
8229
8230 if (JUMP_LABEL (insn) == to)
8231 to_usage = 1;
8232
6a5293dc
RS
8233 /* Maybe TO was deleted because the jump is unconditional.
8234 If so, there is nothing left in this basic block. */
8235 /* ??? Perhaps it would be smarter to set TO
8236 to whatever follows this insn,
8237 and pretend the basic block had always ended here. */
8238 if (INSN_DELETED_P (to))
8239 break;
8240
7afe21cc
RK
8241 insn = PREV_INSN (to);
8242 }
8243
8244 /* See if it is ok to keep on going past the label
8245 which used to end our basic block. Remember that we incremented
d45cf215 8246 the count of that label, so we decrement it here. If we made
7afe21cc
RK
8247 a jump unconditional, TO_USAGE will be one; in that case, we don't
8248 want to count the use in that jump. */
8249
8250 if (to != 0 && NEXT_INSN (insn) == to
8251 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL && --LABEL_NUSES (to) == to_usage)
8252 {
8253 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
8254
8255 insn = NEXT_INSN (to);
8256
8257 if (LABEL_NUSES (to) == 0)
8258 delete_insn (to);
8259
8260 /* Find the end of the following block. Note that we won't be
8261 following branches in this case. If TO was the last insn
8262 in the function, we are done. Similarly, if we deleted the
d45cf215 8263 insn after TO, it must have been because it was preceded by
7afe21cc
RK
8264 a BARRIER. In that case, we are done with this block because it
8265 has no continuation. */
8266
8267 if (insn == 0 || INSN_DELETED_P (insn))
8268 return 0;
8269
8270 to_usage = 0;
8271 val.path_size = 0;
8b3686ed 8272 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, 0, 0, 0);
7afe21cc
RK
8273
8274 /* If the tables we allocated have enough space left
8275 to handle all the SETs in the next basic block,
8276 continue through it. Otherwise, return,
8277 and that block will be scanned individually. */
8278 if (val.nsets * 2 + next_qty > max_qty)
8279 break;
8280
8281 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
8282 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
8283 to = val.last;
8284
8285 /* Prevent TO from being deleted if it is a label. */
8286 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
8287 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
8288
8289 /* Back up so we process the first insn in the extension. */
8290 insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
8291 }
8292 }
8293
8294 if (next_qty > max_qty)
8295 abort ();
8296
8297 /* If we are running before loop.c, we stopped on a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END, and
8298 the previous insn is the only insn that branches to the head of a loop,
8299 we can cse into the loop. Don't do this if we changed the jump
8300 structure of a loop unless we aren't going to be following jumps. */
8301
8b3686ed
RK
8302 if ((cse_jumps_altered == 0
8303 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
7afe21cc
RK
8304 && around_loop && to != 0
8305 && GET_CODE (to) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (to) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
8306 && GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (to)) == JUMP_INSN
8307 && JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)) != 0
8308 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to))) == 1)
8309 cse_around_loop (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)));
8310
8311 return to ? NEXT_INSN (to) : 0;
8312}
8313\f
8314/* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
8315 COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
79644f06
RK
8316 we count each register usage.
8317
8318 Don't count a usage of DEST, which is the SET_DEST of a SET which
8319 contains X in its SET_SRC. This is because such a SET does not
8320 modify the liveness of DEST. */
7afe21cc
RK
8321
8322static void
79644f06 8323count_reg_usage (x, counts, dest, incr)
7afe21cc
RK
8324 rtx x;
8325 int *counts;
79644f06 8326 rtx dest;
7afe21cc
RK
8327 int incr;
8328{
f1e7c95f 8329 enum rtx_code code;
7afe21cc
RK
8330 char *fmt;
8331 int i, j;
8332
f1e7c95f
RK
8333 if (x == 0)
8334 return;
8335
8336 switch (code = GET_CODE (x))
7afe21cc
RK
8337 {
8338 case REG:
79644f06
RK
8339 if (x != dest)
8340 counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
7afe21cc
RK
8341 return;
8342
8343 case PC:
8344 case CC0:
8345 case CONST:
8346 case CONST_INT:
8347 case CONST_DOUBLE:
8348 case SYMBOL_REF:
8349 case LABEL_REF:
8350 case CLOBBER:
8351 return;
8352
8353 case SET:
8354 /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST. */
8355 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != REG)
79644f06 8356 count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
9ff08f70
RK
8357
8358 /* If SRC has side-effects, then we can't delete this insn, so the
8359 usage of SET_DEST inside SRC counts.
8360
8361 ??? Strictly-speaking, we might be preserving this insn
8362 because some other SET has side-effects, but that's hard
8363 to do and can't happen now. */
8364 count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts,
8365 side_effects_p (SET_SRC (x)) ? NULL_RTX : SET_DEST (x),
8366 incr);
7afe21cc
RK
8367 return;
8368
f1e7c95f
RK
8369 case CALL_INSN:
8370 count_reg_usage (CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
8371
8372 /* ... falls through ... */
7afe21cc
RK
8373 case INSN:
8374 case JUMP_INSN:
79644f06 8375 count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
7afe21cc
RK
8376
8377 /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
8378 use them. */
8379
f1e7c95f 8380 count_reg_usage (REG_NOTES (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
7afe21cc
RK
8381 return;
8382
8383 case EXPR_LIST:
8384 case INSN_LIST:
f1e7c95f
RK
8385 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL
8386 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x,0)) == USE)
79644f06 8387 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
f1e7c95f 8388 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
7afe21cc
RK
8389 return;
8390 }
8391
8392 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
8393 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8394 {
8395 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
79644f06 8396 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, dest, incr);
7afe21cc
RK
8397 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
8398 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
79644f06 8399 count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, dest, incr);
7afe21cc
RK
8400 }
8401}
8402\f
8403/* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
8404 that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
8405
8406 This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse. It improves the
8407 heuristics in loop since it won't try to move dead invariants out of loops
8408 or make givs for dead quantities. The remaining passes of the compilation
8409 are also sped up. */
8410
8411void
8412delete_dead_from_cse (insns, nreg)
8413 rtx insns;
8414 int nreg;
8415{
8416 int *counts = (int *) alloca (nreg * sizeof (int));
77fa0940 8417 rtx insn, prev;
d45cf215 8418 rtx tem;
7afe21cc 8419 int i;
e4890d45 8420 int in_libcall = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
8421
8422 /* First count the number of times each register is used. */
8423 bzero (counts, sizeof (int) * nreg);
8424 for (insn = next_real_insn (insns); insn; insn = next_real_insn (insn))
79644f06 8425 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, 1);
7afe21cc
RK
8426
8427 /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
8428 registers or copy a register to itself. As we delete an insn, remove
8429 usage counts for registers it uses. */
77fa0940 8430 for (insn = prev_real_insn (get_last_insn ()); insn; insn = prev)
7afe21cc
RK
8431 {
8432 int live_insn = 0;
8433
77fa0940
RK
8434 prev = prev_real_insn (insn);
8435
e4890d45 8436 /* Don't delete any insns that are part of a libcall block.
77fa0940
RK
8437 Flow or loop might get confused if we did that. Remember
8438 that we are scanning backwards. */
906c4e36 8439 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, NULL_RTX))
e4890d45
RS
8440 in_libcall = 1;
8441
8442 if (in_libcall)
8443 live_insn = 1;
8444 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
7afe21cc
RK
8445 {
8446 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == REG
8447 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
8448 ;
8449
d45cf215
RS
8450#ifdef HAVE_cc0
8451 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == CC0
8452 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
8453 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
8454 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
8455 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
8456 ;
8457#endif
7afe21cc
RK
8458 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) != REG
8459 || REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8460 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)))] != 0
8461 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
8462 live_insn = 1;
8463 }
8464 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
8465 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8466 {
8467 rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
8468
8469 if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
8470 {
8471 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == REG
8472 && SET_DEST (elt) == SET_SRC (elt))
8473 ;
8474
d45cf215
RS
8475#ifdef HAVE_cc0
8476 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == CC0
8477 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt))
8478 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
8479 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
8480 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
8481 ;
8482#endif
7afe21cc
RK
8483 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) != REG
8484 || REGNO (SET_DEST (elt)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8485 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (elt))] != 0
8486 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt)))
8487 live_insn = 1;
8488 }
8489 else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
8490 live_insn = 1;
8491 }
8492 else
8493 live_insn = 1;
8494
8495 /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
e4890d45 8496 being used. */
7afe21cc 8497
e4890d45 8498 if (! live_insn)
7afe21cc 8499 {
79644f06 8500 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, -1);
77fa0940 8501 delete_insn (insn);
7afe21cc 8502 }
e4890d45 8503
906c4e36 8504 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, NULL_RTX))
e4890d45 8505 in_libcall = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
8506 }
8507}
This page took 1.135349 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.